digigate user’s guide · 2017-12-12 · digigate-700™ for windows® - user’s guide v...

266
World Class Security Solutions DigiGate User’s Guide

Upload: doque

Post on 10-Aug-2018

238 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

World Class Security Solutions

DigiGate™

User’s Guide

Page 2: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software
Page 3: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

User’s Guide • • • • • • • • •

DigiGate-700™

Page 4: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Copyright, Trademarks, and Acknowledgments

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Document No. 1200-170 Rev. 3.2 05/01/2004

Printed in the United States of America

COPYRIGHTInformation in this document is subject to change without notice. The software described in this document is furnishedunder a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with theterms of those agreements. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted inany form or any means electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose other than thepurchaser’s personal use, without the written permission of Digitech International, Inc.

PUBLISHED BYDigitech International, Inc.Copyright © 1998-2003All Rights Reserved.

TRADEMARKSDigitech, DigiGate, DigiGraphics, DigiGate-700, and DigiGate-700 for Windows are trademarks of Digitech Interna-tional, Inc. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands andtheir products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should be noted as such.

“Acrobat® Reader Copyright© 1987-2003 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo,Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.”

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTSDocument design concept by Steve CooperDocument layout and design by Jim BarnetteDocument authored by Jim Barnette

ELECTRONIC USER’S GUIDE AND ACROBAT® READERWe have included an electronic version of the DigiGate-700™ for Windows® User’s Guide on yourInstallation CD. This manual is viewable with the Adobe® Acrobat® Reader v3.x - 5.0. For those that donot have the Acrobat® Reader installed, or would like to upgrade your version to 5.0, an installation programhas been provided on your Installation CD. An Icon will be installed on your desktop to invoke the electronicUser’s Guide.

See Appendix J - “Electronic User’s Guide and the Acrobat® Reader” for complete instructions.

Page 5: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

iDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................... iSystem Hardware Repair Policy ................................................................................................................. x

In Warranty Repairs ............................................................................................................................ xNon-Warranty Repairs ........................................................................................................................ xRepair Costs ....................................................................................................................................... x

Bench Repair Charges: ............................................................................................................... xReplacement Parts & Sub-Assemblies: ...................................................................................... x

Terms .................................................................................................................................................. xChapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 1-1

How to Reach Digitech International, Inc. .............................................................................................. 1-1What Is Needed to Run DigiGate-700™ for Windows ........................................................................... 1-2DigiTech™ Customer Support ................................................................................................................ 1-2Contacting The Service Department ........................................................................................................ 1-2What You Need When You Call the Service Department ....................................................................... 1-3Conventions used in this Guide ............................................................................................................... 1-4The Windows 95 Interface ....................................................................................................................... 1-5

Terms Used ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5Windows 95 Screen Objects ............................................................................................................ 1-6Windows 95 Controls ...................................................................................................................... 1-7

Installing the DigiGate-700 for Windows Software ................................................................................ 1-8SiteEdit Information and Installation .................................................................................................... 1-14

Installing SiteEdit .......................................................................................................................... 1-14Minimum System Requirements ................................................................................................... 1-14

Chapter 2 Setting Up a New Site .................................................................................................................... 2-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2Starting the DigiGate-700 for Windows Program ................................................................................... 2-2

To Start the Program ........................................................................................................................ 2-2System Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 2-5

Security Levels ................................................................................................................................ 2-5User IDs ........................................................................................................................................... 2-8Required Fields .............................................................................................................................. 2-11System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 2-12

Default Field Values .............................................................................................................. 2-12Remote Software - Site Definitions .............................................................................................. 2-15

Miscellaneous Setup .............................................................................................................................. 2-17Tenant Profile Codes ..................................................................................................................... 2-17Marketing Codes ........................................................................................................................... 2-19Insurance Codes ............................................................................................................................ 2-21Credit Card Codes ......................................................................................................................... 2-23

System Controller Setup ........................................................................................................................ 2-25Time Zones .................................................................................................................................... 2-25Door Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 2-27Defining Holidays ......................................................................................................................... 2-28Serial Port ...................................................................................................................................... 2-29

Table of Contents

Page 6: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

ii Table of Contents

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Unit Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 2-30Unit Types ...................................................................................................................................... 2-30Unit Features ................................................................................................................................. 2-32Door Types .................................................................................................................................... 2-33Floor Types .................................................................................................................................... 2-35Unit Sizes ...................................................................................................................................... 2-37

Adding Units ......................................................................................................................................... 2-39Unit Numbers ................................................................................................................................ 2-39Unit Size Information .................................................................................................................... 2-40Misc Unit Information ................................................................................................................... 2-40Unit Features ................................................................................................................................. 2-41Door Alarm Options ...................................................................................................................... 2-41

Deleting Units ........................................................................................................................................ 2-42Modifying Units .................................................................................................................................... 2-43

Finding a Unit ................................................................................................................................ 2-43Size ................................................................................................................................................ 2-44Misc ............................................................................................................................................... 2-44Features .......................................................................................................................................... 2-45Door Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 2-45Unit Status ..................................................................................................................................... 2-46

Options Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 2-47LCD Keypad Option ...................................................................................................................... 2-47

Editing Custom Messages ..................................................................................................... 2-47Adding Custom Messages ..................................................................................................... 2-50Deleting Custom Messages ................................................................................................... 2-52Default Preset Messages ........................................................................................................ 2-52Default Custom Messages ..................................................................................................... 2-52

Chapter 3 Operating Instructions ................................................................................................................... 3-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 3-2Move In (Renting a Unit) ........................................................................................................................ 3-2

Selecting a Unit ............................................................................................................................... 3-2Tenant Information .......................................................................................................................... 3-4Misc Information ............................................................................................................................. 3-4Access Information .......................................................................................................................... 3-5Unit Information .............................................................................................................................. 3-5Authorized Information ................................................................................................................... 3-6Notes ................................................................................................................................................ 3-6Linking Units ................................................................................................................................... 3-7

Move Out (Vacating a Unit) .................................................................................................................... 3-8Delinquent (Making a Tenant Delinquent or Paid Up) ......................................................................... 3-11

Selecting a Unit or Tenant ............................................................................................................. 3-11Making Tenants Delinquent .......................................................................................................... 3-12Making Tenants Paid Up ............................................................................................................... 3-13

Transfer (Move/Copy Tenant Record to Another Unit) ........................................................................ 3-14Find (Finding/Editing Unit or Tenant Information) .............................................................................. 3-18Gate (Operate the Gate) ......................................................................................................................... 3-24Reports ................................................................................................................................................... 3-26

Viewing Reports ............................................................................................................................ 3-26Printing Reports ............................................................................................................................. 3-27Saving and Opening Saved Reports .............................................................................................. 3-28

Page 7: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

iiiDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Common Elements of Reports ....................................................................................................... 3-29Unit Reports .................................................................................................................................. 3-30

Delinquent Units .................................................................................................................... 3-30All Units ................................................................................................................................ 3-31Rented Units .......................................................................................................................... 3-32Vacant Units .......................................................................................................................... 3-33Linked Units .......................................................................................................................... 3-34Damaged Units ...................................................................................................................... 3-35Marketing .............................................................................................................................. 3-36Authorized ............................................................................................................................. 3-37Never Locked ........................................................................................................................ 3-38Custom Report ....................................................................................................................... 3-39Days Vacant ........................................................................................................................... 3-41Mailing Labels ....................................................................................................................... 3-42

Misc Reports .................................................................................................................................. 3-44Mux/Slot ................................................................................................................................ 3-44Setup Info .............................................................................................................................. 3-45

Activity Reports ............................................................................................................................. 3-46Onsite ..................................................................................................................................... 3-46Activity Log ........................................................................................................................... 3-47Transactions ........................................................................................................................... 3-49

Utility ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-51System Controller Utilities ............................................................................................................ 3-51

Clear SysCon ......................................................................................................................... 3-51Set Controller ........................................................................................................................ 3-52Download All ......................................................................................................................... 3-53Clear Areas ............................................................................................................................ 3-54Version ................................................................................................................................... 3-55Date/Time .............................................................................................................................. 3-56Activity Log ........................................................................................................................... 3-57Clear Graphics ....................................................................................................................... 3-58Access Code .......................................................................................................................... 3-58Backup ................................................................................................................................... 3-60

Data Utilities .................................................................................................................................. 3-60Restore ................................................................................................................................... 3-61Remove .................................................................................................................................. 3-62

Word Processing - Editor ...................................................................................................................... 3-64DigiEdit ......................................................................................................................................... 3-64

Screen Layout ........................................................................................................................ 3-64Status Bar ............................................................................................................................... 3-65File Menu .............................................................................................................................. 3-65Edit Menu .............................................................................................................................. 3-66Insert Menu............................................................................................................................ 3-66

Creating Merge Documents ........................................................................................................... 3-67Merge ............................................................................................................................................. 3-68Alarm Zone .................................................................................................................................... 3-72

Arm/Disarm .......................................................................................................................................... 3-72Arm/Disarm Unit ........................................................................................................................... 3-73

Page 8: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

iv Table of Contents

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Site ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-74Select Site ...................................................................................................................................... 3-74

Help ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-77The Help System Window ............................................................................................................. 3-77

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 3-78Find ........................................................................................................................................ 3-78

Hypertext Jumps ............................................................................................................................ 3-79Show Me - Videos ......................................................................................................................... 3-79

Exit (Quitting the Program) ................................................................................................................... 3-80DigiGate on the Taskbar Notification Area ........................................................................................... 3-81DigiGate System Options ...................................................................................................................... 3-82

LCD Keypad Option ...................................................................................................................... 3-82Assigning Messages at Move In ............................................................................................ 3-82Assigning Messages in Find/Edit .......................................................................................... 3-82

Picture Option ............................................................................................................................... 3-83Assigning Pictures at Move In .............................................................................................. 3-83Assigning Pictures in Find/Edit ............................................................................................. 3-83The Assignment Process ........................................................................................................ 3-84

Chapter 4 How Do I ...? ................................................................................................................................. 4-1Install the DigiGate-700 for Windows program ...................................................................................... 4-2Start the DigiGate-700 for Windows program ........................................................................................ 4-3Quit the DigiGate-700 for Windows program ......................................................................................... 4-3Backup my data ....................................................................................................................................... 4-3Add Units ................................................................................................................................................ 4-4

Unit Numbers .................................................................................................................................. 4-4Unit Size Information ...................................................................................................................... 4-4Misc Unit Information ..................................................................................................................... 4-4Unit Features ................................................................................................................................... 4-4Door Alarm Options ........................................................................................................................ 4-4

Delete Units ............................................................................................................................................. 4-5Modify Units ........................................................................................................................................... 4-5

Size .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5Misc ................................................................................................................................................. 4-5Features ............................................................................................................................................ 4-5Door Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 4-5

Move a Tenant In ..................................................................................................................................... 4-6Tenant Information .......................................................................................................................... 4-6Misc Information ............................................................................................................................. 4-6Access Information .......................................................................................................................... 4-6Authorized Information ................................................................................................................... 4-6Notes ................................................................................................................................................ 4-6Linking Units ................................................................................................................................... 4-6

Move a Tenant Out .................................................................................................................................. 4-7Make a Tenant Delinquent ....................................................................................................................... 4-7Make a Tenant Paid Up ........................................................................................................................... 4-7Transfer Tenants ...................................................................................................................................... 4-8Link Tenant Units .................................................................................................................................... 4-8Find a Unit/Tenant ................................................................................................................................... 4-9Change Tenant Information ..................................................................................................................... 4-9

Page 9: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

vDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Find System Controller Version ............................................................................................................ 4-10Find Software Version and Serial Number ............................................................................................ 4-10Open and Close the Gate or Hold it Open ............................................................................................. 4-10Set the System Time and Date ............................................................................................................... 4-10Define Security Levels .......................................................................................................................... 4-11Define User IDs ..................................................................................................................................... 4-11Arm/Disarm Unit ................................................................................................................................... 4-12Acknowledge or Arm/Disarm Selected Alarm Zones ............................................................................ 4-12Display the Activity Log ........................................................................................................................ 4-13Configure the Activity Log .................................................................................................................... 4-13Reset the System Controller .................................................................................................................. 4-13Create a Custom Document ................................................................................................................... 4-14Print Mail Merge Letters and Notifications .......................................................................................... 4-14Display Tenants on Site ......................................................................................................................... 4-15Print the Gate Activity ........................................................................................................................... 4-15Display/Print a Mux/Slot Report ........................................................................................................... 4-16Print the System Setup Information ...................................................................................................... 4-16Print a Tenant List ................................................................................................................................. 4-16

Chapter 5 Backing Up Your Data ................................................................................................................... 5-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 5-2Backup Strategies .................................................................................................................................... 5-2Data Backup ............................................................................................................................................ 5-3Data Restore ............................................................................................................................................ 5-6

Appendix A Default Settings & Values ......................................................................................................... A-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ A-2Default Settings ...................................................................................................................................... A-2Default Values ........................................................................................................................................ A-3

Appendix B Preparation for System Setup .................................................................................................... B-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ B-2Do I need User ID and Security Levels? ................................................................................................ B-2What information should I gather about my tenants? ............................................................................ B-2What information should I gather about my units? ................................................................................ B-4What other information should I gather about the site? ......................................................................... B-5

Setting up time Zones ..................................................................................................................... B-5Holiday Information ....................................................................................................................... B-5Required Fields ............................................................................................................................... B-6Default Values ................................................................................................................................ B-6Door Alarm Mux/slot Information ................................................................................................. B-7

Appendix C Preparation for Adding Units .................................................................................................... C-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ C-2Strategies ................................................................................................................................................ C-2

Appendix D Merge Data Fields & Descriptions ........................................................................................... D-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ D-2Merge Database Fields and Descriptions ............................................................................................... D-2

Appendix E Upgrading DOS Software to Windows ..................................................................................... E-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ E-2What’s New in the Windows Version ..................................................................................................... E-2

Security ........................................................................................................................................... E-2User Operations .............................................................................................................................. E-2

Page 10: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

vi Table of Contents

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Access Control ................................................................................................................................ E-2Data Entry ....................................................................................................................................... E-2Marketing ....................................................................................................................................... E-2

Running DigiConvert ............................................................................................................................. E-3Starting the program ....................................................................................................................... E-3What is Converted .......................................................................................................................... E-5Completing Your Setup .................................................................................................................. E-5

Appendix F Troubleshooting Accounting Link Problems ............................................................................. F-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ F-2Running LinkView ................................................................................................................................. F-2Vendor Specific Requirements ............................................................................................................... F-4

MSTC Unit Numbering for Systems with Linking Units .............................................................. F-4Appendix G Program Error Codes ................................................................................................................ G-1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ G-2

Serial Port Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... G-2Database Error Messages ....................................................................................................................... G-3Other Error Messages ............................................................................................................................. G-4

Appendix H Activity Log & Transaction Messages ...................................................................................... H-1Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ H-2Activity Log Messages ........................................................................................................................... H-2

Access Activities ............................................................................................................................. H-2Misc. (SysCon) Activities ............................................................................................................... H-2Board Activities .............................................................................................................................. H-2Time Activities ................................................................................................................................ H-2Alarm Activities .............................................................................................................................. H-4

Transaction Messages ............................................................................................................................. H-4Appendix I The DigiGraphics System ............................................................................................................ I-1

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. I-2Controlling the Display ........................................................................................................................... I-3

Scanning .......................................................................................................................................... I-3Zoom ................................................................................................................................................ I-3Site Status ........................................................................................................................................ I-4Activity Log ..................................................................................................................................... I-4

Programming the Display ........................................................................................................................ I-5The Menu ........................................................................................................................................ I-5Scanning Speeds .............................................................................................................................. I-6The Flash Setting ............................................................................................................................. I-6The Delay Setting ............................................................................................................................ I-6The Status Colors ............................................................................................................................ I-6

Appendix J Electronic User’s Guide and the Acrobat® Reader .................................................................... J-1The Electronic User’s Guide ................................................................................................................... J-2Adobe® Acrobat® Reader ...................................................................................................................... J-2

Appendix K Program Registration ................................................................................................................ K-1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ K-2

Starting the Program for the First Time .................................................................................................. K-2The Temporary Registration Period ........................................................................................................ K-3Program Registration .............................................................................................................................. K-5

Page 11: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

viiDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Appendix L Setting Up the LE Software Version ......................................................................................... L-1Copying the Desktop Icon ...................................................................................................................... L-2Renaming the Copy of… Desktop Icon ................................................................................................. L-4Changing the Properties of the New Desktop Icon ................................................................................ L-5Changes in the LE Version ..................................................................................................................... L-7

The Main Menu .............................................................................................................................. L-7The Report Menu ............................................................................................................................ L-7The Utility Menu ............................................................................................................................ L-8The Setup Menu ............................................................................................................................. L-8

Index ............................................................................................................................................................... X-1

Page 12: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

viii Software License and Warranty

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Terms and Conditions of PurchasePURCHASER understands that unless other-wise specified on a Digitech Sales Order Copy,or other contractual agreement, neitherinstallation nor the warranty thereof, isincluded in this agreement.The PURCHASER hereby recognizes andagrees that the system is a custom integratedsystem that may include both hardware andsoftware, designed particularly for the pre-mises, and the PURCHASER recognizes andagrees that it shall have no subjective right torefuse the system. PURCHASER understandsthat the materials specified on the reverse sideof this agreement, on a signed Digitech SalesOrder Copy, or in executed contractualagreements, properly installed, are sufficient tocomplete the installation as required. Shouldadditional materials be necessary, they may bepurchased at current catalog prices.Should any part of the system be lost, stolen,damaged or destroyed by fire, water, orextraneous causes, whether or not subject tothe PURCHASER’s control; the repair,replacement work, and reinstallation shall becarried out at the expense of the PUR-CHASER. PURCHASER agrees that theSELLER’s obligation hereunder relates solelyto the system as provided by the SELLER, andthe SELLER shall not be liable for any loss ordamage incurred by the PURCHASER causedby PURCHASER’s installation, alteration to,removal of, or tampering with the system.Otherwise, this purchase is subject to theDigitech Written Limited Warranty, the detailsof which are available on request.PURCHASER agrees to pay the purchase priceindicated on the stated terms reflected on aDigitech Sales Order Copy or in contractualagreements. Thereafter, interest shall becharged on any due and unpaid balance at arate equal to one and one-half percent (1 1/2%)per month from the due date until paid in full.

In no event shall the interest be greater than themaximum permitted by applicable law.If the SELLER deems it necessary to employan attorney or collection agency to collect thisaccount, or any part thereof, the PURCHASERagrees to pay actual, reasonable attorney feesor collection costs.By installing or using Software provided withthis purchase, PURCHASER indicates accep-tance that the software is part of a systemconsisting of the software and the hardware itcontrols, that the software is meant to beinstalled on only one computer (includingNetwork Terminals, if so noted), and thatsoftware may be supplied to PURCHASERwith a temporary activation code. Once allpurchase terms have been complied with,including all payments as agreed, a SoftwareRegistration will be issued with a permanentactivation code.This agreement shall be interpreted andgoverned by the laws of the State of NorthCarolina.The PURCHASER represents that this Agree-ment constitutes the entire agreement betweenPURCHASER and SELLER and that no otheragreements, promises, representation, under-takings, warranties, express or implied, exceptthose expressly set forth herein have beenrelied upon by PURCHASER, or have beenmade to PURCHASER by SELLER, its agents,or employees, and that no modification of thisAGREEMENT shall be claimed by PUR-CHASER subsequent to the execution hereofunless first reduced to writing and executed bythe parties hereto.Further, the PURCHASER acknowledges andagrees that the SELLER has not made, and thePURCHASER is not relying upon any repre-sentation or warranties, express or implied,except as contained herein, and any and allimplied warranties are hereby expressly waivedby PURCHASER.

Page 13: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

ixDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Written Limited WarrantyEffective with products delivered on or afterJuly 1, 2003:Digitech International, Inc. (Seller) warrants toyou, the original purchaser, that for the statedwarranty term, Digitech will, at no extracharge, repair or replace with new or recondi-tioned parts, any of its manufactured compo-nents, which is defective in material or work-manship, provided the original part has beeninstalled and maintained properly and isreturned for inspection and verification ofwarranty coverage. The decision to repair orreplace will be at the discretion of the manu-facturer. The warranty period shall be twoyears on all Digitech manufactured equipment,with the exception of camera equipment andvertical gate operators, which carry a one-yearwarranty and the DigiView Digital Recorder,which carries a three year warranty. Originalequipment manufacturer’s warranties willapply to all other equipment supplied byDigitech, acting as a value-added reseller. Allreturned parts and products become theproperty of Digitech International, Inc. Laborand incidental costs to uninstall original partsand re-install replacement parts provided underthis Limited Warranty shall be the responsibil-ity of the PURCHASER. This Limited War-ranty does not include service, replacement, orrepair of damage to the product resulting fromaccident, disaster, misuse, or abuse; extraneouscauses including lightning and transientcurrents; or modifications of the product notspecifically approved by Digitech.

Limited Warranty service may be obtained bypre-paid delivery of the product to the warrantyservice location during the warranty period,providing a Return of Materials AuthorizationNumber (RMA) has been issued. Claimantagrees to insure the product or assume the riskof loss or damage in transit, to prepay shippingcharges, and to use the original shippingcontainer or equivalent.If a product is defective as described above,PURCHASER’S sole remedy shall be repair orreplacement as provided herein. In no eventshall SELLER be liable for any damages,including any lost profits, lost savings, or otherincidental or consequential damages arising outof the use of, or inability to use such product,or for any claim by any other party, even ifSELLER has been advised of the possibility ofsuch damages. PURCHASER acknowledgesand it is agreed between the parties hereto thatthe SELLER is not an insurer and that theSELLER’s exclusive liability is contained inthis statement.To the maximum extent permitted by appli-cable law, SELLER and its suppliers disclaimall other warranties, either express or implied,including but not limited to implied warrantiesof merchantability and fitness for a particularpurpose, with regard to the software, hardware,and accompanying written materials. Thislimited warranty gives you specific legal rightsthat may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

Page 14: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

x System Hardware Warranty and Repair Policy

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

GeneralEquipment to be repaired may be sent to DigitechInternational, Inc. after a Return Authorization Numberhas been issued by the Customer Service Department. Theitems should be shipped prepaid to:

Digitech International, Inc.Attn: Service Department

409 New Leicester HighwayAsheville, NC 28803

Service & Repair Telephone/Fax NumbersPhone: (828) 250-9767 Fax: (828) 250-0799

A detailed packing list showing the Return AuthorizationNumber, quantity, product, purchase order number for anyout-of-warranty repairs, return address, telephone numberand any special instructions must be included with theshipment. Equipment shipments made on a COD basiswill be refused.

Each returned item shall have a written description of thedefect on the packing list.

Upon receipt by Digitech International, Inc., eachshipment will be inspected to verify all items are receivedas listed, and that defects are due to failure under normalusage, not user negligence. Damaged or defective itemswhich are not covered by warranty will be handledaccording to the non-warranty repair policy.

In Warranty RepairsEach DigiGate system and major sub-assembly bears awarranty expiration date.

Defective units still under warranty will be repaired asstated in the original warranty agreement.

The warranty period for repaired items shall be 90 days orthe remainder of the original warranty period, whichever

is greater.

Non-Warranty RepairsDefective items not covered under warranty will berepaired and charged based on the current charges in effectat the time of the repair.

The warranty period for repaired items shall be 90 daysfrom the date of shipment from Digitech International,Inc.

Repair CostsThese published service and repair costs are subject tochange without notice.

Bench Repair Charges:Hourly rate ........................................................ $65.00Minimum charge .............................................. 1 hour

Replacement Parts & Sub-Assemblies:Subject to the prices in effect at the time of repair.

TermsAll shipments to Digitech International, Inc., are to beprepaid. Freight shipments to Digitech International, Inc.on a COD basis will be refused.

Digitech International, Inc. will pay surface freightcharges on the return of repaired units under warranty. Airfreight charges will be added to the repair fee. All freight,shipping and handling charges will be billed to thecustomer on units out of warranty.

Repair and air freight charges will be invoiced tocustomers who have established credit lines with DigitechInternational, Inc. Repaired items returned to companiesdoing business on a COD basis will be subject to the CODfee, which will be added to the repair charge.

System Hardware Repair Policy

Page 15: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Chapter 1

Introduction

How to Reach Digitech International, Inc.

CORPORATE ADDRESSDigitech International, Inc.

409 New Leicester HighwayAsheville, NC 28806

INTERNET AND E-MAILOur Web site is

www.digitech-intl.comE-Mail to Sales at

[email protected] to Service at

[email protected] drawings by E-Mail [email protected]

TELEPHONE AND FAXMain Office (828) 250-9767

Fax Line (828) 250-0799Tech Support (800) 523-9504

1. How to Reach Digitech International, Inc ........................

2. What Is Needed to Run DigiGate-700 for Windows ........

3. DigiTech Customer Support ............................................

4. Contacting the Service Department ..................................

5. What You Need When You Call the Service Department

6. Conventions Used in this Guide ........................................

7. The Windows 95 Interface .................................................

8. Installing the DigiGate-700 for Windows Software .........

Corporate Address, Phone, Fax,E-Mail, and Web Site.

System Requirements.

Who to call if you have problems.

How and when to call for Help.

System Worksheet.

How to know what certain symbols,text formats, and terms mean in thismanual.

Understanding Windows 95 ScreenObjects and their use.

Loading the software onto your PC.

Page 16: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 2 Introduction

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

What Is Needed to Run DigiGate-700™ for Windows

If your computer is running under any Operating System other than Windows 95, 98, or NT; this programwill not operate correctly, if at all, and the Service Department cannot support the Software. You should ask forthe DOS version of the DigiGate-700 program.

Our Service Department hours are from 8 A.M. to 6 P.M. Eastern time Monday through Friday. Callsafter hours or on weekends are taken by a Voice Mail system. Your call will be handled at the earliestpossible time during our regular hours.

If you call during normal hours and receive the voice mail message, all of our technicians are servingother customers. Please leave your name, telephone number (including area code), the name of your site, thelocation of your site (city, state), and a short message about the difficulty you are experiencing. Ourtechnicians will return your call as soon as possible. Calls are returned in the order they are received.

If your situation is not resolved on the first call, your Service Technician will issue an IncidentNumber. When you call back on that same problem, please have the Incident Number that you were givenand the Technician’s name available. If you hear the voice mail message, the Service Technician that handledyour call is on the phone with another customer, and you should leave a message. In your message, give yourname, telephone number and the Incident Number you were issued. This will insure that the correcttechnician receives the call; and that your call will be handled on a priority basis.

The information needed by your Service Technician is listed on the following page (1-3). Having thisinformation available when you call will shorten the time needed to diagnose and correct your problem. Itwill also reduce the time required for a technician to return a call because calls are being processed asefficiently as possible.

DigiTech™ Customer Support

Contacting The Service Department

Due to many site specific variables in setup and configuration, your DigiTech Value Added Resellermay provide a quicker solution. Please contact the vendor where you purchased the product before contact-ing Digitech International, Inc.

MUMINIM DEDNEMMOCER

66/2XD68408htiwCPelbitapmocroMBI rossecorpmuitnePhtiwCPelbitapmocroMBI

MARBM8 MARBM61

ataD&margorProfecapsksiDdraHeerfBM51 metsySpleHhtiwecapsksiDdraHeerfBM03

htiw)4moC-1moC(troplaireSenO detacideDI QR )4ro3(,

htiw)4moC-1moC(troplaireSenO detacideDI QR )4ro3(,

rofTN,89,59swodniWybdetroppusmedoMetiSetomeRhcaerofmedoMenodnaCP

rofTN,89,59swodniWybdetroppusmedoMetiSetomeRhcaerofmedoMenodnaCP

ecafretnilellaraphtiwretnirptejkniroxirtamtoD retnirpdevorppaTN/89/59niW

troplellarapenO troplellarapenO

TNro,89,59swodniW metsysgnitarepO TNro,89,59swodniW metsysgnitarepO

Page 17: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Before calling our Service Department, please have the following information available.••••• DigiGate-700 Serial Number ______________.

On the label of your software diskette(s), CD-ROM, or in the“Version” selection of the “Utility” menu.

••••• The DigiGate-700 Software Version ______________.In the “Version” selection of the “Utility” menu.

••••• The System Controller Chip Version ______________.In the “Version” selection of the “Utility” menu.

••••• The Manufacturer and Model of your PC ______________, ______________.

••••• The Total Memory (RAM) on your PC ______________.

••••• A Printout of your DigiGate-700 System SetupSelect the Report button on the Main Menu, then the MiscReports tab and the Setup Info button to print the report

••••• Accounting/Mgt. Software Name & Version, if Linked ______________, ______________.

••••• The System Controller Serial Port (Com1…Com4) ______________.

••••• Any other Serial Devices attached to your PC ______________, ______________.(I.e. Mouse; Modem; Serial Printer; and the Serial Ports where theyare attached.)

••••• Exactly what you did before the error occured ____________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________.

••••• The entire error message you received ____________________________.(a Print of the Screen if possible)

Additional Information for Remote Access or a Remote Site••••• The Headquarters and Remote Site modem’s Manufacturer ______________, ______________.

••••• Modem Model Numbers ______________, ______________.

••••• Modem Baud Rates ______________, ______________.

••••• Modem Initialization Strings ______________, ______________.

••••• Telephone Numbers to access each of them ______________, ______________.

••••• Remote Access Software ______________.

••••• Remote Access Logon & Password ______________, ______________.

What You Need When You Call the Service Department

Page 18: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 4 Introduction

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Conventions used in this Guide

lobmyS/tamroF noitinifeD elpmaxE

cilatIlairAdloB stcejboneercSrosnoitcelesuneMstneserpeRtcelesot

ehtotrosrucehtevoM teS nottub

>lairAdloB< secarbnitxet CPehtnoyekastneserper-erawtfoSehtnIdraobyeK

ecivedatneserperlliwsiht,smetierawdrahnOdraobano)cte,elbac,repmuj,pihc,gulp.e.i(

.ecivedlortnocaro

sserP >retnE<

ehtevomeR >3J< .repmuj

" ralugeRreiruoC " txetroretneotsiresuehttxetlautcA..neercsehtnodeyalpsid

epyT " IGID\DC sserpdna">retnE< ehtepyttoNoD.

!skramnoitatouQ

txetsemiTdloB otsnaemtnoflamrons'ediuGehtnitxetdloB.ksatamrofrep

tceleS eht puteStinU .bat

"" lliwtnoflamrons'ediuGehtdnuorasnoitatouQediugehtnisnoitcesrehtotneserperotdesueb

.setouqnidesolcnetxetehtezisahpmeotro

nonoitces"puteSmetsyS"ehteeS()...egap

••

nipetsenorotsilanimetinaetacidniotdesUrofdesueboslalliwsrebmuN.erudecorpa

.siht

• tceleS eht puteStinU .bat• kcilC no epyTtinU .

.1.2

petsarotsilanimetinaetacidniotdesuoslArofdesueboslalliwstelluB.erudecorpani

.siht

.1 tceleS eht puteStinU .bat.2 kcilC no epyTtinU .

>2yeK<>1yeK< uoytahtetacidnisyekdraobyekelpitluMnwodtidlohdnayektsrifehthsupdluohs

.yekdnocesehtgnisserpelihw

sserP >C<>lrtC< ehtypocot.stnetnoc

}2c|1c{ hcaE.smetiehtmorfeciohCresUasetacidnI.rablacitrevaybdetarapessieciohc

tceleS }lecnaC|KO{ ehtnodesab.noitautis

Page 19: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Terms Used

For those of you that are new to Windows, we have included a basic look at the Windows way of doing things. Fora more complete description of Windows , see the “Introducing Microsoft Windows ” manual that came with theOperating System on your PC.

Windows is a Graphical User Interface or GUI. This means that instead of having to type commands into thecomputer to make things work, you have pictures or icons that you can use to do the things that need to be done. Yourcomputer’s Mouse is used to push buttons, select items from lists, and do most of the work. Most of the time, you onlyneed to use the keyboard to enter the information about your tenants or other information that is specific to yourlocation.

All of the objects used on the screens are standard Windows objects and for most of the program, the Windowsstandard is followed. In some instances the program deviates from this standard for the user’s convenience.

In this section, terms and objects associated with Windows and operating the GUI are described and pictured togive you a basic knowledge of how the screens look and work.

The Windows Interface

eT rm feD i oitin nrosruC .tcejboroaeracificepsaotnoitnettatceridotdesuneercsehtnorotacidninA

rosruCesuoM siesuomehtsaneercsehtrevoslevarttahtretniopworrAnasasraepparosrucesuomehT”I“naotepahssegnahcti,yrtnetxetstpeccahcihwaeranarevodevomnehW.devom

.ysubnehwssalgruoHnaotroaerayrtnetxetehtgnitacidni,maeb

rosrucneercS neercsehtnotcejbohcihwsetacidni,rosrucesuomehtmorfsreffidhcihw,rosruCneercsehTroevitcasi .detceleS nocihpargrotxetehtdnuoraelgnatcerdettoda,sbatrosnottubnO

yllausu,enillacitrevdilosa,sdleifyrtnetxetroF.rosrucehtsetacidnitcejboehtfoecafehtrosexobtsilhtiW.deretneeblliwtxeterehwnoitisopehtdnarosrucehtsetacidni,gniknilb

ebnacnoitcelessihT.roloctnereffidanisyalpsidtxetfoenileritneeno,stsilnwodpordybrosyekworralanoitceridehthtiwdegnahc gnitceleS ehT.esuomehthtiweciohcrehtona

ehthtiwdevomebnacrosrucneercs >baT< eht,yek >baT<>tfihS< ta,noitanibmocyekehtsemit >retnE< ybro,yek gnitceleS .esuomehthtiwtcejborehtona

kcilC .nottubesuomtfelehtgnihsupsetacidnI

kcilCelbuoD gnikcilC rognitavitcafodohtemehtsisihT.noisseccusdiparnieciwtnottubesuoMtfelehtgnitceleS .esuomehthtiwtcejbona

kcilCthgiR gnikcilC nepootdesusisihT.nottubesuoMthgiReht sneercSpleH ro noitarugifnoCsuneM .

garD gnikcilC otdesusisihT.esuomehtgnivomelihwnwodtignidlohdnanottubesuoMtfeLeht.neercsehtnostcejboevom

,thgilhgiH,oToGtceleS ro, hsuP

eht,syeKworrAlanoitceridehtesU >baT< ehtevomotesuoMs’retupmocehtro,yekdnalortnocrotcejbodetatsehtotrosruc kcilC ehtsserpronottubesuomtfeleht >retnE<

.lortnocehtetavitcalliwsihT.yek hsuP otsnaemdnanottubarofdesusi kcilC ehtno.nottub

Page 20: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 6 Introduction

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Windows Screen Objects

Figure 1-1

Figure 1-2

Figure 1-3

Figure 1-4

Figure 1-5

Figure 1-6

Figure Name Description

Push Buttons Figure 1-1 shows a group of four Push Buttons; Edit,Add, Delete, and Close. Each of these buttonshas a graphic picture and a text label to describe theaction the button will perform when Pushed. TheSelected button in the group, the Add button, isnoted by the Cursor, a dotted box around the label.You activate a button’s action by Clicking the Mouseon it or by pressing the <Enter> key when it is theselected button.

Text Box Figure 1-2 shows a Text Box. It appears as arecessed white area on the screen. When the TextBox is selected the Cursor is a vertical line inside theText Box. The Text Box is a data entry fieldwhere you type information.

List Box Selected

Lis t Box Opened

Figure 1-3 shows the List Box or Combo Boxselected with the cursor as a blue highlighted text area.The Combo Box is a combination of a pop up listand a text area, Figure 1-4. The list is opened byclicking on the button with the down arrow, locatedto the right of the text area. When opened the list willshow one of the rows (items) selected with theCursor. You can select any item in the list by clickingon it, or by moving the cursor up or down with thedirections arrow keys and pressing the <Enter> key.The list will close and your selection will be displayedin the text area.

Radio Buttons Figure 1-5 shows a Radio Button set. A RadioButton set is another form of list where one item isselected. The selected item in the list is shown as ablack dot in one of the recessed white circles. Whenthe Radio Button object is selected, the Cursor is adotted box around the label of the selected item. Youcan select any item in the list by clicking on it, or bymoving the cursor up or down with the directionalarrow keys.

Grid Figure 1-6 shows a Grid. The Grid is a table ofrows and columns that show information in anorganized way. Each row shows information about aspecific item. (i.e. A unit, a Tenant, a code, etc.) Eachcolumn holds a different piece of information aboutthat item. Depending on the purpose of the Grid, itwill act differently. You may be allow you to enter oredit existing information, or the Grid may act as aselection list where you can choose one of the items(Rows). When the Grid is Selected, the Cursor is ahighlighted row in the table.

Page 21: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Windows Controls

Figure 1-7

Figure 1-9

Figure 1-10

Figure 1-11

Figure 1-12

Arrowhead

I-Beam

Hourglass

Figure 1-8

Figure Name Description

Window Title Bar The top band of a Window is the Title Bar which holds the mainWindow Controls.

Window Title BarWindow Controls

The Window Control Icon, loacated in the upper right corner ofthe Window (title Bar), will Close , Minimize or Resize theWindow. The "X", on the right, closes the Window, the "-", onthe left, minmizes the Window to the Task Bar, and the BoxSymbol, in the center, resizes the Window from full screen tothe default or user set size.

Window Title BarMain Menu Control

The Digitech International logo in the upper left corner of theWindow (Title Bar) is actually a button that opens a menu forthe Window. Clicking on this icon opens the Windows' MainMenu.

Window Main Menu A Windows' Main Menu duplicates the actions of otherControls and allows keyboard control of these actions where theother controls may require the Mouse to activate their actions.Actions that are allowed are shown in dark letters and actionsnot allowed are dimmed. Restore will open a Window that hasbeen minimized to its original state. Move and Size are selfexplanatory. Minimize reduces the Window to an icon on theTask Bar, the same as "_". Maximize expands the Window tofull screen, the same as the Box Symbol and Close removesthe Window and closes the program or routine the same as "X".

HorizontalScroll Bar

VerticalScroll Bar

The Horizontal and Vertical Scroll Bars appear when thecontent of the Window is larger that the size of the Windowscreen. In these cases the Window is a viewer that moves overteh content by using the Scroll Bars . The Scroll Bars aremoved by dragging the actual bar along the track or byclicking on the directional arrows at each end of the bar. Sincethis is supposedly moving the Window over the contents, thecontents will appear to move in the opposite direction of theScroll Bar.

Mouse Cursors The Mouse Cursor has been explained in the Terms Use dsection of this chapter and is included here for viewing. The IBe am shape is displayed whenever text may be entered, andthe Arrowhead shape is displayed over Controls or blank areasof the Window. The Hourglass appears when a task is inprogress and blocks interference from the user.

Page 22: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1 - 8 Introduction

Figure 1-16

Figure 1-17

1. Before starting the installation process, close allapplications running on your computer.

2. On the Windows 95 Task Bar, Click on theStart button. Figure 1-16.

3. Select Settings then Control Panel.Figure 1-16.

4. Double Click on Add/Remove Programs.Figure 1-17.

Installing the DigiGate-700 for Windows Software

Page 23: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1 - 9Publication TitleDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure 1-18

Figure 1-19

5. When the Add/Remove Programs windowopens, Select the Install/Uninstall tab.

6. Click the Install button. Figure 1-18.

7. When the screen shown in Figure 1-19 appears,insert the Disk labeled “DigiGate-700 forWindows Installation Disk #1” into the floppydisk drive “A” or insert the CD-ROM into theCD drive.

Page 24: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1 - 10 Introduction

Figure 1-20

Figure 1-21

8. Figure 1-20 shows the prompt you should see inthe Command Line text box. If this is notwhat you see, type “A:\SETUP.EXE.” If youare installing from a CD ROM use the letter ofthe CD ROM drive in place of the “A.” DoNOT type the quotation marks.

9. Click on the Finish button.10. Note the Back button. Clicking on this button,

at any time it is active, will return you to theprevious step in the installation procedurewhere you can edit the entry.

11. Figure 1-21 shows the Setup window whichloads the installation Wizard in Windows 95.Wait this one out.

Page 25: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1 - 11Publication TitleDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure 1-22 Figure 1-23

12. Figure 1-22 shows the Welcome window. Ifyou have any other programs running, Click onthe Cancel button to close the DigiGateinstallation, close all other programs that maybe running, and restart the Installation.

13. If there are no other programs running, Click onthe Next button.

14. Figure 1-23 shows the User Informationwindow. Here you should enter your Name andthe Company name.

15. Click on the Next button.

Page 26: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1 - 12 Introduction

Figure 1-24 Figure 1-25

16. Figure 1-24 shows the Select ProgramFolder window. You will be asked for aProgram Group name. The default is“DigiGate for Windows.” You mayaccept this, type in your choice, or select fromthe list of existing groups on your PC.

17. When all is correct, Click on the Next button.

18. Figure 1-25 shows the Start Copy Fileswindow. This Window shows you the selec-tions you have made to this point. If any ofthese are incorrect, you can Click on the Backbutton and correct the entry.

19. When all is correct, Click on the Next button.

Page 27: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1 - 13Publication TitleDigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure 1-27

Figure 1-26

20. After all user information is entered, the Setupwindow, Figure 1-26, starts the actual installa-tion and shows the progress with the fourthermometers on the screen.

21. If you choose to stop the Installation at anytime, Click on the Cancel button.

22. If you are installing from floppy disks, you willbe asked to change disks several times duringthe installation procedure. Figure 1-27. Checkthat you are inserting the correct numbered diskeach time and then Click on the OK button. Ifyou put in the wrong disk, the screen asking youto change disks will be repeated until you insertthe correct disk or Click on the Cancel button.

Note: See Appendix L for instructions to createa second

Page 28: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

1 - 14 Introduction

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

SiteEdit combines an image editor with a database to allow you to modify your DigiGraphics™ site fileseasier to work with.

A DigiGraphics™ site includes four files:Site.Pcx Large image with unit numbersZoom.Pcx Small imageUnitInfo.Dbf Unit number databaseUnitInfo.Mdx and index

These files must be edited from the DigiGraphics™ disk directory (‘A:\’ drive). Make sure the “Writeprotect” tab on your diskette is closed. This will allow access to the DigiGraphics™ diskette. Once you haveedited the files, copy them back to the DigiGraphics™ disk and restart the DigiGraphics™ generator.

Unit numbers are read from the database and superimposed on the image. They are not actually part of theimage. DigiGraphics™ requires each unit number to be completely enclosed in a unit. SiteEdit allows you toresize or move unit numbers anywhere on the image. When working with unit numbers, take care that theydon’t move outside any units, or touch a unit border from the inside.

The unit number database works only with images named ‘SITE.PCX’. When images with other names arecreated, they are saved without unit numbers.

The image editor creates 256-color PCX files using the DigiGraphics™ color palette.

SiteEdit Information and Installation

Installing SiteEdit1. From the Windows desktop, Select Start, then Click on the Run option.2. In the Run window enter “{D}:\SITEEDIT\SETUP.EXE” where {D} is the letter of your CD ROM

drive.3. Click the OK button to start the SiteEdit installation.4. Carefully follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. The application will be installed in

the C:\Program Files\SiteEdit directory.

Minimum System RequirementsOperating System - Windows 95 or betterVideo card - 256 colorsMemory - 8MB RAM or better

Page 29: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction .................................................................................

2. Starting the DigiGate-700 for Windows Program ....................

3. System Setup ...............................................................................

4. Miscellaneous Setup ....................................................................

5. System Controller Setup .............................................................

6. Unit Setup ....................................................................................

7. Adding Units ................................................................................

8. Deleting Units ..............................................................................

9. Modifying Units ...........................................................................

10. Options Setup ..............................................................................

Other information you may need

To Start the Program

Security LevelsUser IDsRequired FieldsSystem Configuration

Tenant Profile CodesMarketing CodesInsurance CodesCredit Card Codes

Time ZonesDoor AlarmsDefining HolidaysSerial Port

Unit TypesUnit FeaturesDoor TypesFloor TypesUnit Sizes

Unit NumbersUnit Size InformationMisc. Unit InformationUnit FeaturesDoor Alarm Options

Removing Units from the Database

Finding a UnitSizeMisc.FeaturesDoor AlarmsUnit Status

LCD Keypad Option

Chapter 2

Setting Up a New Site

Page 30: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 2 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. On the desktop, Double Click on the Digi-Gate-700 for Windows icon that was createdat installation.OR

2. On the Windows 95 Task Bar, Click on theStart button. Figure 2-1.

3. Select Programs then DigiGate for Windows,or the Program Group you selected in Step 17 inChapter 1 (Installing the DigiGate-700 forWindows Software, Figure 1-24, Page 1-12) asshown here in Figure 2-1.

4. Click on DigiWin which will start the program.Figure 2-1.

5. The DigiTech Logo screen lets you know thatthe program is loading. Figure 2-2.

Starting the DigiGate-700 for Windows Program

Figure 2-1Figure 2-2

Introduction

Before you start the DigiGate-700 for Windows program for the first time, you need to make sure that theDigiTech System Controller is powered up and connected to one of the serial ports on your PC. When theprogram starts, it searches for the System Controller. If found, the information about the connection is stored.If not detected, you should check for proper power connection and data connection to the PC.

If your location is using the DOS version of DigiGate, SeeAppendix E before you continue!The DigiGate-700 system has been developed for both large and small locations. Many of the features maynot be necessary for your site.Before you start to set up this software, you have several decisions to make! Please use Appendix A,Default Settings & Values and Appendix B, Preparation for System Setup to help you in decisionsabout setting up the software for your location.

To Start the Program

Page 31: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

6. When the program has loaded, the DigiGateLog On window will be shown over theDigiGate for Windows Main Screen.Figure 2-3.

NOTE: If your DigiGate-700™ for Windowssystem displays the Information window witha message that the program requires a “Regis-tration Number”, Figure 2-3a, see “Appendix K,Program Registration Codes,” for instructionsbefore continuing.

7. The first time the program is started you willhave to enter the default User ID and Pass-word. These are “USER” for the User ID and“1234” for the Password as shown in Figure2-4. Note that all characters typed into thePassword text box are shown as asterisks (*).

8. Click on OK to continue or Cancel to return tothe desktop.

NOTE: If you plan to set up User Security foryour DigiGate-700 for Windows software, westrongly recommend that you add a new MasterUser ID and Password. Then delete thedefault “User” and “1234”. See the section“Setting up System User IDs” later in thischapter for the steps to do this.

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-4

Figure 2-3a

Page 32: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 4 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

9. When you Click on OK to continue for the firsttime, the Information window opens with aprompt of “AutoDetect Com Port.” Figure 2-5.

10. Click on the Yes button to have the systemlocate the System Controller.

11. This will open the Auto Detect SystemController window. Figure 2-6.

12. Click on the OK button to start the operation oron the Cancel button to continue without thetest.

13. The system will test all communication portsfor the presence of the System Controller andset the system for communications with theSystem Controller, if it is found.

14. If the System Controller cannot be located, anError window will be shown with a prompt of“System Controller not found.”Figure 2-7.

15. Click on the OK button to continue.

NOTE: Not finding the System Controller willnot affect the setup described in this chapter. Itwill, however, affect the operation of your gatesystem. Before your system will workcorrectly, you need to establish and testcommunications between the PC and theSystem Controller, reset the system, and verifythat all information has been downloaded to theSystem Controller and that the system isoperating properly.

Figure 2-5

Figure 2-7

Figure 2-6

Page 33: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 2-9

1. From the Main screen Click on the Setupbutton. Figure 2-8a.

2. This will open the Setup Menu. Figure 2-9.Click on the System Setup tab.

3. Then Click on the Security button.

System Setup

Security Levels

All major configuration of the DigiGate-700 for Windows system is done from the Setup button on theMain screen. Here we will set up Security Levels, User IDs, Required Fields, and Default Values, UnitInformation, Credit Card Information, Marketing codes, and other information for analysis of your locationand tenants.Security Levels are used to allow or deny access to portions of the system. User IDs allow each user tospecify different configurations for their use. (i.e. Verify prompts for certain actions, Activity log settings,security level, etc.) Required fields let you guarantee that specific information MUST be entered. TheDigiGate-700 system requires some fields in order to operate correctly. You can determine which other fieldsmust be completed for each tenant or unit. Default fields let you define information that will be entered intothe record for you automatically whenever you add a new tenant or unit (i.e. City, State, Area Code, etc.).This can save valuable time during the information entry process and you can change this information in thetenant or unit record for those who differ.See “Appendix A, Default Settings and Values” for more information on how the DigiGate-700 for Windowsprogram is configured when you receive it.NOTE: We would like to point out the Bubble Help feature of the DigiGate-700 for Windows program. InFigure 2-8, you see the help bubble below the Arrow Cursor. The help bubble gives a brief description ofwhat the object under the cursor does. It remains on the screen for approximately 5 seconds. After 5 secondsthe help bubble vanishes and the normal cursor is displayed. Figure 2-8a.

Figure 2-8

Figure 2-8a

Page 34: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 6 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Define Security Levelswindow. Figure 2-10. The MG level, Man-agement, is the level shipped with theDigiGate-700 for Windows program. It allowsaccess to all functions in the system. Considerthis to be the Top Level or master security levelin the system.

5. Click on the Add button to enter anothersecurity level.

6. This will open the Add Security Levelwindow. Figure 2-11.

7. The window opens with blank fields. To add anew level, Select the Security Level field andtype the two character code you choose. Wehave used “RM” as the Security Level code and“Relief Manager” as the Description in theexample. Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-10Figure 2-11

Page 35: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13

8. Next, Click on the Options tab which willshow the screen in Figure 2-12.

9. Click on the check boxes to Select or Deselecteach option as preferred.

NOTE: The Setup Menu allows access toSecurity and all configuration settings for thesystem. The Setup Menu box should beunchecked for any user that should not haveaccess to these options.

10. Click on the OK button when all selectionshave been made or the Cancel button toabandon the Add function.

11. To Edit an existing level, Click on the line youwant to edit, in the Define Security Levelwindow. Figure 2-10, Page 2-6. The line willbe blue when it is selected.

12. Click on the Edit button.

13. This will open the Edit Security Levelwindow. Figure 2-13. This window is the sameas the Add window. Change the informationyou want and Click on the OK button to acceptthe changes or the Cancel button to discard thechanges.

14. To Delete an existing level, Click on the lineyou want to delete in the white portion of theDefine Security Level window. Figure 2-10,Page 2-6. The line will be blue when it isselected.

15. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm your decision if the VerifyPrompts option has been selected in the UserID setup.

16. Click on the Yes button to delete the record orthe No button to return to the Edit SecurityLevel window without deleting the record.

Page 36: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 8 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the System Setup tab of the SetupMenu, Figure 2-9, Page 2-5, Click on theUser Ids button.

2. This will open the User IDs window.Figure 2-14.

3. To add a new user, Click on the Add button.

4. This will open the Add a new User IDwindow. Figure 2-15.

5. Select the User ID field and enter a new 4character user name. We have used “JOE1”here. Figure 2-15.

6. Select the Password field and type in a 4character password. We have used “1357”here. Figure 2-15.

7. Click on one of the selections { Yes | No } inthe Verify Prompts radio button set. Figure 2-15.

NOTE: We strongly suggest that you check theYes selection for Verify Prompts. This willcause a Confirm window (Figure 2-19, Page2-10) to appear whenever you have started adestructive action such as deleting a record, etc.This gives you a chance to verify that you wantto do this and that it is not an accidental action.Setting the option to Yes may save having tore-enter data when it is accidentally deleted.The Confirm window, will not appear if VerifyPrompts is set to No. It will appear if VerifyPrompts is set to Yes.

Figure 2-14

User IDs

Figure 2-15

Page 37: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 9DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

8. Select the Security Level list box by Clickingon the data area or the down arrow at the rightside of the data area. The list will drop downshowing the available security levels.Figure 2-16.

9. Select the proper security level by Clicking onthe text. The box will close and your selectionwill be displayed.

10. Click on the Activity Log tab to display thesetup window. Figure 2-17.The Activity Log is the display of gate anddoor activity for the DigiGate-700 for Win-dows system. It can be set to display wheneverthe Main DigiGate for Windows tool bar isopen.

11. In the Display Activity Log radio button set,Click on one of the selections { Yes | No } tohave the monitor display or not displayrespectively. Figure 2-17.

12. If you selected Yes in the Display set, you canset the number of items to display and thelength of time the Monitor displays. Select theNumber of Activities to Display text box.Here you can type in the number you prefer oruse the spinner arrows on the right to increaseor decrease the number. Figure 2-17.

13. Select the Number of Seconds to Displaytext box. This is the amount of time themonitor will remain on the screen when it isactivated. Entering a zero (“0”) in this selectionwill keep the Activity Log open continuously.

14. Enter your choice in the Number of Secondsto Display text box.

15. Click on OK to accept and add a new user orCancel to discard the information entered.

Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17

Page 38: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 10 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

16. To edit a User’s settings, Select the user in thelist. Figure 2-14, Page 2-8.

17. Click on the Edit button. The Edit User IDwindow will open. Figure 2-18. This windowis the same as the Add window. Change theinformation you want and Click on the OKbutton to accept the changes or the Cancelbutton to discard the changes.

18. To Delete an existing User, Click on the lineyou want to delete in the white portion of theUser IDs window. Figure 2-14, Page 2-8. Theline will be blue when it is selected.

19. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm your decision if the VerifyPrompts option has been selected in the UserID setup. Figure 2-19.

20. Click on the Yes button to delete the record orthe No button to return to the User IDswindow without deleting the record.

Figure 2-18

Figure 2-19

Page 39: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 11DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the System Setup tab of the SetupMenu, Figure 2-9, Page 2-5, Click on theRequired Fields button.

2. This will open the Required Fields window.Figure 2-20.

3. The window opens with the Tenant Informa-tion tab active. The Last Name field is theonly listed field that is required for DigiGate-700 for Windows, all others are optional foryour use. These check boxes are toggles, whichmeans that the state changes every time youclick on one of them. If it is checked when youclick on it, the box becomes unchecked, andvice versa. A check in the box means that thefield is required, no check means that it is notrequired.

4. Select the fields you want to make mandatorywhen you enter tenant information.

5. When all Tenant Information fields havebeen set as you want them, Click on the UnitInformation tab.

6. This opens the Unit Information windowwhich shows the fields you can require whenyou enter unit information. Figure 2-21.

7. Select the fields you want to make mandatorywhen you enter unit information.

NOTE: Be careful before you Select the MuxNumber and Slot Number fields. Thesefields are ONLY for units that have individualdoor alarms. If EVERY door at your locationhas an individual door alarm, then you maycheck these two as required fields. If all doorsare not alarmed, DO NOT Select these twofields.

8. When all Unit Information fields have beenset as you want them, Click on the OK buttonto accept the choices, or on the Cancel buttonto discard selections and return to the SetupMenu.

Figure 2-20 Figure 2-21

Required Fields

Page 40: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 12 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the System Setup tab of the SetupMenu, Figure 2-9 Page 2-5, Click on theConfiguration button.

2. This will open the System Configurationwindow. Figure 2-22.

3. The window opens with the Tenant Informa-tion tab active. Down the left side of thescreen is the default Address and Phoneinformation. Enter your City, State, Zip and theArea Code and Exchange most used at yourlocation.

4. We have used our local information as anexample. Figure 2-23.

5. Select the drop down list boxes by Clicking onthe data area or on the down arrow on the rightside of the box. Select the entry you want tomake the default when you enter tenantinformation, by Clicking on the data line in thelist.

6. The Insurance box is shown open inFigure 2-23.

Figure 2-22 Figure 2-23

Default Field Values

The System Configuration window is used to set the default values for the DigiGate-700 forWindows system. The information here will be entered into every new tenant record automatically, savingyou data entry time. This tenant information may be changed in the tenant record for cases that do not matchthe default. Even though some of this information will be entered in the following sections, we are presentingthis section first to give you an idea of the possibilities and allow you to plan for the setup of these fields.Except for the address and telephone information, all fields in the Tenant Information window are dropdown list boxes from which you make selections. The information found in these list boxes is the defaultshipped with the system and can be changed or added to in the following sections of this chapter. Most of theinformation on the User window has been set up and will be explained in greater detail later in this section.

System Configuration

Page 41: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 13DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

7. The six list boxes are shown in Figure 2-24,with the defaults values that are shipped withthe DigiGate-700 for Windows program. Ifthese are not sufficient for your needs; see thenext section, Miscellaneous Setup, to changethe Tenant Profile, Marketing, Insurance,or Credit Card codes, or the following section,System Controller Setup, to change theTime Zones. Both of these sections are in thischapter.

8. When all Tenant Information fields havebeen set as you want them, Click on the Usertab.

9. This opens the User window. This screenholds system defaults that affect the overalloperation of the program. Figure 2-25.

10. The first consideration is User Security andRequire User IDs. Click on the check box toactivate or deactivate this feature. Whenactivated, the DigiGate Log On windowallows users to start the program with their ownconfiguration, allows restriction of features tocertain users, and tracking of user activity onthe system. If deactivated, all users haveaccess to all functions of the system andconfiguration is by the DigiGate defaults youhave set up for the system.

11. The Verify Prompts selection will controlwhat is used as the default for new Users.

NOTE: If Require User IDs is checked,Figure 2-25, the Verify Prompts selection inthe User IDs setup, Figure 2-15, Page 2-8, willcontrol the display of confirmation screens formost activities. Selecting Yes (Checked) hereonly sets the default for adding new Users.

Figure 2-24 Figure 2-25

Page 42: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 14 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

12. The Default Security Level list box holds allof the security levels that were set up earlier inthis section. If the User IDs is activated, thisselection will be used as the default level forany new users you add. Figure 2-26.

13. To set the Default Security Level, Click onthe text area or the down arrow at the right sideof text area to open the list.

14. Click on the level you want as default.15. The list will close and your selection will be

displayed.16. The Select Backup Set field contains

“SiteOne.set” in the directory specified inthe program installation. This file is predefinedand included with the shipped program.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowsprogram uses Microsoft Backup, which MUSTbe installed on your computer before you canuse the DigiGate backup function.

17. Clicking on the folder at the right side of thisfield opens the Windows 95/98 Browse window.Figure 2-27. You MUST be familiar withcreating Windows backup sets or jobs to useany other than the default selection.

NOTE: See Chapter 5, Backing Up YourData, for additional information on Backup Setsand using other backup programs on yoursystem.

18. When all System Configuration fields havebeen set as you want them, Click on the OKbutton to accept the choices, or on the Cancelbutton to discard selections and return to theSetup Menu.

Figure 2-26 Figure 2-27

Page 43: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 15DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the System Setup tab of the SetupMenu, Click on the Define Sites button.Figure 2-28.

2. This will open the Define Sites window.Figure 2-29.

NOTE: Sites are defined prior to shipping yoursoftware, based on the information provided byyour reseller or project manager. Site informa-tion may be modified as needed. To add ordelete sites, contact your reseller or projectmanager.

3. Select the Site and Click on the Edit button.Figure 2-29.

Figure 2-28 Figure 2-29

Remote Software - Site DefinitionsThis section ONLY applies to systems using the Remote version of the software.

Systems that use the Standard version software will not have the Site button on their MainMenu, Figure 2-8, Page 2-5, or the Define Site button on the System Setup tab of theSetup Menu, Figure 2-28.

Page 44: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 16 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 2-30 Figure 2-31

4. The Modify Site screen opens with the SiteName tab active. This screen holds the SiteNumber, Site Name, and Address information.Figure 2-30.

5. Enter the information requested and click on theOther Info tab.

6. This screen holds the phone number to themodem at the site, if this is a remote site, andthe location of the Unit and Tenant data files forthis site. Figure 2-31.

7. For a remote site, enter the telephone number ofthe modem at the remote site in the ModemNumber field. If this is a headquarters or localsite, leave this field blank.

8. The Data Path field will hold the location ofthe Unit and Tenant files for this site. The datapath was set up before shipping your softwareand has been created on your PC duringinstallation of the program. DO NOTCHANGE THIS INFORMATION UNLESSDIRECTED TO DO SO!

9. Click on the OK button to accept the changes oron the Cancel button to abandon the changeand return to the Define Sites selection screen.

NOTE: Repeat steps 3 - 9 for each site listedon the Define Sites selection screen.Figure 2-29, Page 2-15.

Page 45: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 17DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Misc Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Profiles button.Figure 2-32.

2. This will open the Modify Profile Typeswindow. Figure 2-33.

3. To add a new code, Click on the Add Button.Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-32Figure 2-33

Tenant Profile Codes

Miscellaneous SetupThis section deals with information about your tenants, their use of the Unit, payment method, etc. Theinformation in this section can be set as the default for fields to be entered at Move-In. It may also bemodified at the time of Move-In when necessary.You may also decide which of these are needed for your location and make them Required Fields. See page 2-11.

Page 46: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 18 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Profile Typeswindow. Figure 2-34.

5. Select the Profile Type field and type in a new2 character code. The characters will alwaysdisplay as capitals.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing type, Select the record youwant to edit in the Modify Profile Typeswindow. Click on the Edit button.Figure 2-33, Page 2-17.

9. This will open the Edit Profile Typeswindow. Figure 2-35. Note that the Type fieldis not available for editing, only the Descrip-tion field may be changed.

10. Select the Description field and change theinformation.

11. Click on OK to accept the changes or Cancelto discard the information entered.

12. To delete an existing type, Select the record youwant to delete in the Modify Profile Typeswindow. Figure 2-33, Page 2-17. The line willbe blue when it is Selected.

13. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window. Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

NOTE: If you delete a code that is used in atenant record, the code is removed from thetenant record. This may affect the record if thedeleted code is a required field.

14. Click on the Yes button to delete the record orthe No button to return to the Modify ProfileTypes screen without deleting the record.

Figure 2-34 Figure 2-35

Page 47: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 19DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Misc Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Marketing button.Figure 2-36.

2. This will open the Modify Marketing Typeswindow. Figure 2-37.

3. To add a new code, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-36Figure 2-37

Marketing Codes

Page 48: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 20 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Marketing Typeswindow. Figure 2-38.

5. Select the Marketing Type field and type in anew 2 character code. The characters willalways display as capitals.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing type, Select the record youwant to edit in the Modify Marketing Typeswindow. Click on the Edit button.Figure 2-37, Page 2-19.

9. This will open the Edit Marketing Typeswindow. Figure 2-39. Note that the Type fieldis not available for editing, only the Descrip-tion field may be changed.

10. Select the Description field and change theinformation.

11. Click on OK to accept the changes or Cancelto discard the information entered.

12. To delete an existing type, Select the recordyou want to delete in the Modify MarketingTypes window. Figure 2-37, Page 2-19. Theline will be blue when it is Selected.

13. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

NOTE: If you delete a code that is used in atenant record, the code is removed from thetenant record. This may affect the record if thedeleted code is a required field.

14. Click on the Yes button to delete the record orthe No button to return to the Modify Market-ing Types screen without deleting the record.

Figure 2-38 Figure 2-39

Page 49: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 21DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Misc Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Insurance button.Figure 2-40.

2. This will open the Modify Insurance Typeswindow. Figure 2-41.

3. To add a new code, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-41.

Figure 2-40Figure 2-41

Insurance Codes

Page 50: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 22 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Insurance Typeswindow. Figure 2-42.

5. Select the Insurance Type field and type in anew 2 character code. The characters willalways display as capitals.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing type, Select the record youwant to edit in the Modify Insurance Typeswindow. Click on the Edit button.Figure 2-41, Page 2-21.

9. This will open the Edit Insurance Typeswindow. Figure 2-43. Note that the Type fieldis not available for editing, only the Descrip-tion field may be changed.

10. Select the Description field and change theinformation.

11. Click on OK to accept the changes or Cancelto discard the information entered.

12. To delete an existing type, Select the record youwant to delete in the Modify InsuranceTypes window. Figure 2-41, Page 2-21. Theline will be blue when it is Selected.

13. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

NOTE: If you delete a code that is used in atenant record, the code is removed from thetenant record. This may affect the record if thedeleted code is a required field.

14. Click on the Yes button to delete the record orthe No button to return to the Modify Insur-ance Types screen without deleting therecord.

Figure 2-42 Figure 2-43

Page 51: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 23DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Misc Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Credit Card button.Figure 2-44.

2. This will open the Modify Credit Card Typeswindow. Figure 2-45.

3. To add a new code, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-45.

Figure 2-44Figure 2-45

Credit Card Codes

Page 52: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 24 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Credit Card Typeswindow. Figure 2-46.

5. Select the Credit Card Type field and type ina new 2 character code. The characters willalways display as capitals.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing type, Select the record youwant to edit in the Modify Credit Card Typeswindow. Click on the Edit button. Figure 2-45, Page 2-23.

9. This will open the Edit Credit Card Typeswindow. Figure 2-47. Note that the Type fieldis not available for editing, only the Descrip-tion field may be changed.

10. Select the Description field and change theinformation.

11. Click on OK to accept the changes or Cancelto discard the information entered.

12. To delete an existing type, Select the record youwant to delete in the Modify Credit CardTypes window. Figure 2-45, Page 2-23. Theline will be blue when it is Selected.

13. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window. Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

NOTE: If you delete a code that is used in atenant record, the code is removed from thetenant record. This may affect the record if thedeleted code is a required field.

14. Click on the Yes button to delete the record orthe No button to return to the Modify CreditCard Types screen without deleting therecord.

Figure 2-46 Figure 2-47

Page 53: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 25DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 2-48Figure 2-49

1. Click on the SysCon Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Time Zone button.Figure 2-48.

2. This will open the Define Time Zoneswindow. Figure 2-49.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with two pre-defined Time Zones:“0” and “1.” The zero time zone is fixed andcannot be modified. Time Zone 0 is for 24Hr. Access. Time Zone 1 is labeledNormal Hours and is set for 6 AM to 10 PM.These times can be modified.

3. To add a new code, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-49.

Time Zones

System Controller SetupThis section deals with technical information about your Site and the way your Gate System will operate.You may decide that one or two of these are not necessary for your location.

Page 54: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 26 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Time Zones window.Figure 2-50.

5. Select the Number field and type in a newzone number between 1 and 64.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Enter the times for “Sunday.” The OPENcolumn is the time your system will start toallow entry to your site, and the CLOSEDcolumn is the time when it will stop allowingentry.

NOTE: Clicking on the Repeat button to theright of the Sunday times will copy whatevervalues you entered into the Sunday times, to allother days. This is done to save you time ifeach day or most days have the same hours.

8. Enter any times that differ into the fieldsneeded.

9. Click on OK to accept and add a new zone orCancel to discard the information entered.Figure 2-50.

NOTE: Clicking on the Closed button to theright of Holiday times will make the gateinactive for the Holidays you define later in thischapter. Figure 2-51.

10. To edit an existing Time Zone, Select therecord you want to edit in the Define TimeZones window. Figure 2-49, Page 2-25.

11. Click on the Edit Button. Figure 2-49,Page 2-25.

12. This will display the screen shown inFigure 2-47.

13. Follow Steps 6 through 9.14. To delete a Time Zone, Select the record you

want to edit in the Define Time Zoneswindow. Figure 2-49, Page 2-25.

15. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

16. Click on the Yes button to confirm or the Nobutton to retain the Time Zone.

Figure 2-50 Figure 2-51

Page 55: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 27DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the SysCon Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Door Alarmsbutton. Figure 2-52.

2. This will open the Door Alarm Optionswindow. Figure 2-53.

NOTE: This screen is used to set the way theDigiGate-700 for Windows system handlesvacant units when Door Alarms are present.The Yes check box, under the Should Unitsbe ... prompt, is a system setup value, meaningit will always be active. The Arm/DisarmVacant Units selection list is an immediateaction and can be used at any time.

3. Click on the Yes check box to Select the optionyou want. Checked means that units will bedisarmed when a tenant moves out and the unitis vacated, then rearmed when a new tenant ismoved in. Unchecked means that the unit willremain armed when vacant. Figure 2-53.

4. To arm or disarm all vacant units at yourlocation, click on the appropriate button in thelist, Arm Vacant Units or Disarm VacantUnits then Click on the OK button to immedi-ately arm or disarm the vacant units.

NOTE: This option allows very flexiblecontrol over your units. For example: you maywant your vacant units disarmed during the day,allowing you to show them to prospectiverenters, and have the same units armed whenyour office is closed to notify of any attempt atentry. This can be easily accomplished by usingthis screen to disarm the vacant units when youarrive and then arm the vacant units wheneveryou leave.

5. Click on Cancel to abandon the operationwithout changing anything.

Figure 2-52 Figure 2-53

Door Alarms

This section applies ONLY if you have individual Door Alarms. If there are NO individual Door Alarmsat your location, skip this section.

Page 56: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 28 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the SysCon Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Holidays button.Figure 2-52, Page 2-27.

2. This will open the Define Holidays window.Figure 2-54.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with NO pre-defined Holidays.

3. To add a new holiday, Click on the Add Button.Figure 2-54.

4. This will open the Holidays window.Figure 2-55.

5. The Number field is assigned by the systemautomatically with the next sequential number.You cannot edit this value.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Select and open the Month list box and Selectthe correct month. Figure 2-55.

8. In the calendar displayed for Day, Click on theday of the Holiday you are defining.

9. Click on OK to accept and add a new holiday orCancel to discard the information entered.

10. To edit a holiday, Select it from the list, Figure2-54, Click on the Edit button and change theinformation you chose using steps 6 through 9above. Figure 2-55.

11. To delete a holiday, Select it from the list, Clickon the Delete Button. Figure 2-54.

12. You will be asked to confirm by the Confirmwindow. Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

13. Click Yes button to delete the holiday or theNo button to abandon and leave the holidaydefined.

Figure 2-54 Figure 2-55

Defining Holidays

Page 57: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 29DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 2-56

Serial Port

1. Click on the SysCon Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Serial Port button.Figure 2-56.

2. This will open the Define Serial Port window.Figure 2-57.

3. The Select Serial Port selection list will haveall available ports selectable, (dark prompts),and ports that are in use by other equipment ornon existent ports will be dimmed out and notselectable.

4. For local sites or non-remote systems, if youknow which port is connected to the SystemController, click on that selection. Figure 2-57.

5. For remote sites, click on the Modem selec-tion. Figure 2-57a.

6. Click on OK to accept the new port setting. Ifmodem is selected, it will attempt to connect atthis time.

7. Click on Cancel to discard the informationentered.

The configuration of the serial port is different for local and remote sites. As stated before, remote systemsare connected to modems that communicate over phone lines by the TAPI interface provided in Windows 95.TAPI, Telephony Application Programming Interface, was developed jointly by Microsoft and Intel, andenables Windows applications to share telephony devices with each other and provides a common means ofhandling different media (voice, data, fax, video, etc.) on a wide range of hardware platforms. A change fromthe DOS version is that any connection to a remote site will remain connected as long as the DigiGateprogram is running and you do not disconnect from the site. Use the Site button on the main menu to selectsites. If you have a local site as Site 1, the DigiGate-700 system should have detected the Serial Port the firsttime you started the software. If this did not happen, there may be a communication problem with the SystemController.

Figure 2-57

Figure 2-57a

************************************************************************************NOTE: If you have purchased LCD Keypads, see the “Options” section of this chapter for setupinstructions.************************************************************************************

Page 58: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 30 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Unit Types button.Figure 2-58.

2. This will open the Modify Unit Typeswindow. Figure 2-59.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with two predefined Unit Types:“RV Parking” and “Self Storage.”

3. To add a new type, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-59.

Figure 2-58

Figure 2-59

Unit Types

Unit SetupThis section deals with what information you want to maintain at your location. Unit Types, Unit Features,Door Types, Floor Types, and Unit Sizes are all optional information. The necessity of entering informationhere will be determined by what you entered in the Required Fields section. You may decide that one ormore of these items is not necessary for your location. Simply skip those sections.

Page 59: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 31DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Unit Type window.Figure 2-60.

5. Select the Unit Type field and type in a 2character type code. The entry will always becapitalized.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing Unit Type, Select the recordyou want to edit in the Modify Unit Typeswindow. Figure 2-59, Page 2-30.

9. Click on the Edit button. This will open theEdit Unit Type window. Figure 2-61.

10. Follow Steps 5 through 7.11. To delete a Unit Type, Select the record you

want to delete in the Modify Unit Typeswindow. Figure 2-59, Page 2-30.

12. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

13. Click on Yes in the Confirm window to deletethe Unit Type.

Figure 2-60 Figure 2-61

Page 60: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 32 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Unit Featuresbutton. Figure 2-58, Page 2-30.

2. This will open the Modify Unit Featureswindow. Figure 2-62.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with three predefined UnitFeatures: “Climate Control,” “DoorAlarms,” and “Interior Electric.”

3. To add a new type, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-62.

4. This will open the Add Unit Feature window.Figure 2-63.

5. Select the Feature Type field and type in a 2character type code. The entry will always becapitalized.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing Unit Feature, Select therecord you want to edit in the Modify UnitFeatures window. Figure 2-62.

9. Click on the Edit button. This will open theEdit Unit Feature window. Follow steps 6and 7.

10. To delete a Unit Feature, Select the record youwant to delete in the Modify Unit Featurewindow. Figure 2-62 then Click on Yes in theConfirm window.

11. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

12. Click on Yes in the Confirm window to deletethe Unit Feature.

Figure 2-62Figure 2-63

Unit Features

Page 61: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 33DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Door Types button.Figure 2-64.

2. This will open the Modify Door Typeswindow. Figure 2-65.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with two predefined Door Types:“Rollup Door” and “Swing Door.”

3. To add a new type, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-65.

Figure 2-64

Figure 2-65

Door Types

Page 62: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 34 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Door Type window.Figure 2-66.

5. Select the Door Type field and type in a 2character type code. The entry will always becapitalized.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing Door Type, Select therecord you want to edit in the Modify DoorTypes window. Figure 2-65, Page 2-33.

9. Click on the Edit button. This will open theEdit Door Type window. Figure 2-67.

10. Follow steps 6 and 7.11. To delete a Door Type, Select the record you

want to delete in the Modify Door Typeswindow. Figure 2-65, Page 2-33.

12. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

13. Click on Yes in the Confirm window to deletethe Door Type.

Figure 2-66 Figure 2-67

Page 63: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 35DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Floors button.Figure 2-68.

2. This will open the Modify Floor Typeswindow. Figure 2-69.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with one predefined Floor Type:“Ground Level.”

3. To add a new type, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-69.

Figure 2-68

Figure 2-69

Floor Types

Page 64: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 36 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Floor Type window.Figure 2-70.

5. Select the Floor Type field and type in a 2character type code. The entry will always becapitalized.

6. Select the Description field and type in yourdescription.

7. Click on OK to accept and add a new type orCancel to discard the information entered.

8. To edit an existing Floor Type, Select therecord you want to edit in the Modify FloorType window. Figure 2-69, Page 2-35.

9. Click on the Edit button. This will open theEdit Floor Type window. Figure 2-71.

10. Follow steps 6 and 7.11. To delete a Floor Type, Select the record you

want to delete in the Modify Floor Typewindow. Figure 2-69, Page 2-35.

12. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

13. Click on Yes in the Confirm window to deletethe Floor Type.

Figure 2-70 Figure 2-71

Page 65: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 37DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Unit Sizes button.Figure 2-72.

2. This will open the Modify Unit Sizes window.Figure 2-73.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem ships with NO predefined Unit Sizes.

3. To add a new type, Click on the Add button.Figure 2-73.

Figure 2-72

Figure 2-73

Unit Sizes

Page 66: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 38 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Add Unit Size window.Figure 2-74.

5. Select the Unit Size field and type in adescription.

6. Select the Square Feet field and type in theactual floor feet.

7. Select the Height field and type in the actualunit height.

8. Select the Price field and type in the actual unitrental price.

9. Click on OK to accept and add new informationor Cancel to discard the information entered.

10. To edit an existing Unit Size, Select the recordyou want to edit in the Modify Unit Sizeswindow. Figure 2-73, Page 2-37.

11. Click on the Edit Button.12. This will open the Edit Unit Size window.

Figure 2-75.13. Follow steps 6 through 9.14. To delete a Unit Size Code, Select the record

you want to delete in the Modify Unit Sizeswindow. Figure 2-73, Page 2-37.

15. Click on the Delete button. You will be askedto confirm by the Confirm window.Figure 2-19, Page 2-10.

16. Click on Yes in the Confirm window to deletethe Unit Size.

Figure 2-74 Figure 2-75

Page 67: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 39DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Add Units button.Figure 2-76.

2. This will open the Add Units window.Figure 2-77.

NOTE: The Unit Number tab is active andthere are four additional tabs whose screenshold the additional information that wasselected or deselected in the Required Fieldssection. Unit numbers can be one to six digits inlength. Valid characters are A - Z, 0 - 9, -, and*. If adding a block of units the starting andending unit numbers should be the same length(i.e. starting unit A001, ending unit A010).

3. To add a consecutively numbered group ofunits, Select the Starting Unit Number fieldand enter the first number. Figure 2-77.

4. Select the Ending Unit Number field andenter the last number. Figure 2-77.

NOTE: To add one unit, enter the samenumber in the Starting Unit Number andEnding Unit Number fields.

5. To increment numbers by a value other thanone, enter the value in the Increment By field.

6. If you do not have Required Fields or DoorAlarm information for this group, Click on theOK button. The Add Unit Progress bar willreflect the units being added. Otherwisecontinue with the following steps.

Figure 2-76Figure 2-77

Adding UnitsBefore you can rent units at your location, you must create (add) the units in the DigiGate database. Thisprocedure can be very simple or more involved depending on what information you have chosen to maintainin the “Required Fields” section, how your site is numbered, and how your units types are laid out. When youinitially Add units to the database you can enter groups or blocks of numbers which share common features.Later when you need to modify or change information, it must be done on one at a time basis. Because thiscan be very time consuming, we suggest you see “Appendix C, Preparation for Adding Units” to aid indeciding what is the most efficient way to proceed in this section. This procedure must be done for eachsite individually! Use the Site button on the Main Menu to Select sites.

Unit Numbers

Page 68: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 40 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. If you selected Unit Size as a Required Field,Click on the Size tab and Select the proper sizedescription from the Size list box. TheSquare Feet, Height, and Price fields willdisplay the information you entered earlier inthe set up procedure. Figure 2-78.

1. If you selected Unit Type, Door Type,Floors, or Inside/Outside as Required Fields,Click on the Misc tab and Select the properdescriptions from the appropriate list boxes. Ifnecessary, Click on the proper Inside orOutside selection. Figure 2-79.

Figure 2-78 Figure 2-79

Unit Size Information Misc Unit Information

Page 69: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 41DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

NOTE: The following features deal strictlywith systems that have individual door alarms.Most of these systems have been set up byDigitech International, Inc. prior to shipmentor have been configured by a reseller or installerbased on the way units were wired for alarms.If you do not have a complete workingknowledge of individual door alarms andtheir set up in the DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem, DO NOT CHANGE ANY INFORMA-TION IN THE DOOR ALARM SECTION!!You can render your system INOPERABLE!

1. If all of the units in the group you are addinghave individual Door Alarms, Click on theDoor Alarm tab.

2. Select the Mux list box and from the list ofboards, Select the correct board. Figure 2-81.

3. After a Mux board has been selected, the Slotfield will be activated. Until a board is selected,this field is deactivated and cannot be selected.Use the Up or Down arrows at the right side ofthe box to increase or decrease the number inthe Slot field or type a number in directly. Thisnumber is the starting slot number for the groupof units you are adding.

4. Select the Alarm Zone list box and from thelist of boards, Select the correct zone for thisunit or group of units. Normally there is onlyone zone, Door Alarms.

5. If you are loading multiple units that have slotnumbers in some sequence respective to the unitnumbers, select one of the choices {Increase |Decrease} and the value to increment BY inthe Auto Slot Loading Options area.

6. Click OK to add the units or Cancel toabandon the operation.

Figure 2-80 Figure 2-81

Unit Features

Door Alarm Options

1. If you selected Feature 1, Feature 2, orFeature 3 as Required Fields, click on theFeatures tab and select the proper featuresfrom the appropriate list boxes. Figure 2-80.

Page 70: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 42 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Delete Units button.Figure 2-76, Page 2-39.

2. This will open the Delete Units window.Figure 2-82.

3. To delete a consecutively numbered group ofunits, Select the Starting Unit Number fieldand type in the first unit number in the group.Figure 2-82.

4. Select the Ending Unit Number field andtype in the last unit number in the group. Figure2-82.NOTE: To delete one unit, enter the samenumber in the Starting Unit Number and theEnding Unit Number fields.

5. Click on the Delete button to remove theseunits from the database or on the Cancel buttonto abandon this operation and return to theSetup Menu.

6. Clicking on the Delete button, Figure 2-82,opens the Confirm window with the prompt of“Delete Units?.” Figure 2-83.

7. Click on the Yes button to continue and deletethese units or the No button to abandon thisoperation and return to the Delete Unitswindow.

Figure 2-82

Figure 2-83

Deleting UnitsDeleting Units is required occasionally when major changes are made to a site or when you have loaded arange of units that includes some non existent ones. This feature allows you to remove unwanted units whennecessary.

Page 71: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 43DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the SetupMenu, then Click on the Modify Unitsbutton. Figure 2-84.

2. This will open the Modify Unit Informationwindow. Figure 2-85.

NOTE: The Modify Unit Informationwindow is a grid. Each row in the grid is a unit.

3. Select a unit, (row in the grid) and Click theEdit button to modify unit information, asdescribed in the following sections, or theClose button to abandon this operation andreturn to the Setup Menu. Figure 2-85.

Figure 2-84

Figure 2-85

Modifying UnitsModifying Units may be used to do price changes, unit feature changes, or fix errors found from the initialloading of units. The unit screen is basically the same as that found in the Add Units section.

Finding a Unit

Page 72: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 44 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. This will open the Modify Unit (number)window with the Size tab active. Figure 2-86.

2. To modify the unit’s size code, Click on theSize tab and Select the proper size descriptionfrom the Size list box. The Square Feet,Height, and Price fields will display theinformation you entered earlier in the set upprocedure. Figure 2-86.

1. To modify Unit Type, Door Type, Floors, orInside/Outside, Click on the Misc tab andSelect the proper descriptions from theappropriate list boxes. If necessary, Click onthe proper Inside or Outside selection.Figure 2-87.

Figure 2-86 Figure 2-87

Size Misc

Page 73: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 45DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. To modify Feature 1, Feature 2, or Feature3, Click on the Features tab and Select theproper features from the appropriate list boxes.Figure 2-88.

NOTE: The following features deal strictlywith systems that have individual door alarms.

If you do not have a complete workingknowledge of individual door alarms andtheir set up in the DigiGate-700 for Windowssystem, DO NOT CHANGE ANY INFORMA-TION IN THE DOOR ALARM SECTION!!You can render your system INOPERABLE!

1. To modify individual door alarms, Click on theDoor Alarm tab.

2. Select the Mux list box and from the list ofboards, Select the correct board. Figure 2-89.

3. For the Slot field use the Up or Down arrows atthe right side of the box to increase or decreasethe number in the Slot field.

4. To modify the alarm zone, Select the AlarmZone list box and from the list of zones, Selectthe correct zone for this unit. Normally there isonly one zone: “Door Alarms.”

5. To modify the unit alarm status, Select the UnitAlarm Status list box and from the list, Selectthe correct status for this unit.

Figure 2-88 Figure 2-89

Features Door Alarms

Page 74: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 46 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. To modify the unit status, Click on the UnitStatus tab.

2. Select (check) or Deselect (uncheck) the Markthis unit as damaged check box as needed.Figure 2-90.

3. Click on the OK button to modify the unit or onthe Cancel button to abandon the operation.

4. This opens the Confirm window with a promptof “Modify Unit.” Figure 2-91.

5. Click on the Yes button to complete themodifications or on the No button to abandonthe operation and return to the Modify UnitInformation window.

Figure 2-91

Unit Status

Figure 2-90

Page 75: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 47DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the SysCon Setup tab of the SetupMenu, Click on the LCD button. Figure 2-92.

2. This will open the Add/Edit LCD Messageswindow. Figure 2-93.

3. Click on a line in the list box to make yourselection and then Click on the Edit button.

NOTE: We have used the “Main Screen”selection here to show you how to edit the texton the display that will be seen by anyone at thekeypad until they enter a code.

Figure 2-92Figure 2-93

LCD Keypad Option

Options SetupThis section deals with specific options that may be purchased with your DigiGate-700 for Windows system.If any of these options are included in your system, use the instructions below, in addition to the instructionsin previous sections, to complete the setup of your Site.

The LCD Keypad’s display is used to notify your tenants of actions or situations occurring with their entry orexit of the facility or of a specific message you have for them. In addition to the “Main Screen,” there arepreprogramed, default messages to notify the person entering of the status of their actions or their accountcondition. These will vary in number depending on the number of LCD Keypads, and the messages neededfor each of them. In addition to these default messages you may enter and control the output of Custommessages. The Custom messages can be assigned to a specific tenant and set to display only when that tenantuses a specific LCD Keypad.The section below is a continuation of the SysCon Setup section on Page 2-25 through 2-29 and deals withadding, editing, or deleting messages. See “Chapter 3, Operating Instructions,” for information on assigningmessages to tenants.

Editing Custom Messages

Page 76: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 48 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Edit message window.Figure 2-94.

NOTE: The Message Number is alwaysassigned by the system. You cannot edit thisnumber, only the description, activity code,message, timer, count, and the Keypads that itwill be displayed on.

For the Main Screen, all you can change is thedescription, timer, and Keypads that it will bedisplayed on.

5. Make any changes you need as shown inFigures 2-94 and 2-95.

6. Click on the LCD Screen tab. Figure 2-95.

Figure 2-95Figure 2-94

Page 77: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 49DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

7. This will open the Edit message screen.Figure 2-96.

8. Line One, Line Two, Line Three, and LineFour are the fields where you can edit themessage text. Make any changes you need to,the text will appear in the simulated LCD screenabove as it would at the keypad.

9. When done, Click on the OK button.

10. This will return you to the Add/Edit LCDMessage window. Click on the Close buttonor Select another message and Edit.Figure 2-97.

Figure 2-96 Figure 2-97

Page 78: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 50 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Add button on the Add/Edit LCDMessages window. Figure 2-98.

2. This will open the Create new messagewindow. Figure 2-99.

3. The Message Number and the Activity Code arepreset in this screen and cannot be changed.

4. In the Description field, type in your name forthis message. Make sure the name will remindyou of the full message. Figure 2-99.

5. The Timer may be changed with the arrows onthe right side of the field. This setting repre-sents the number of seconds the message willremain on the LCD screen at the keypad.

6. The Count may be changed with the arrows onthe right side of the field. This setting repre-sents the number of times the message willdisplay on the LCD screen when an assignedtenant uses the keypad.

7. Select the Input Points (Keypads) where youwant the message to display. Only LCDKeypads will be selectable.

8. Click on the LCD Screen tab at the top of thescreen.

9. This will open the LCD Screen window.

Figure 2-98Figure 2-99

Adding Custom Messages

Page 79: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 51DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 2-100.10. You can type your message in the four line

fields and see a representation of the way it willlook on the LCD Keypad screen in the displayabove the text fields.

11. Click on the OK button to save the newmessage or on the Cancel button to discard themessage.

12. This will return you to the Add/Edit LCD

Message window. Click on the Close button orSelect another function. Figure 2-101.

NOTE: There may be a total of 64 messages inthe system numbered from “0” to “63.” Thisnumber includes Preset and Custom messages.Preset messages are defined in the softwarebefore it is shipped to the site based on thenumber of LCD Keypads and messages neededfor each of them. All available numbers abovethe Preset messages are available for Custommessages that you may define. When addingCustom messages the next available number isautomatically assigned. When this numberreaches 63, you have used all availablemessages.

Figure 2-100 Figure 2-101

Page 80: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

2 - 52 Setting Up a New Site

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Select the message you want to delete in thelistbox. Figure 2-102.

2. Click on the Delete button on the Add/EditLCD Messages window. Figure 2-102.

3. This will open a Confirm window.Figure 2-103.

4. Click on the Yes button to delete the messageor on the No button to abandon the operation.

5. This will return you to the Add/Edit LCDMessage window. Figure 2-102.

6. Click on the Close button or Select anotherfunction.

Figure 2-102

Figure 2-103

Deleting Custom Messages

Default Custom MessagesDescription Message

Refer Refer a friend, Get a discount.Please see the manager.

Supplies Packing and moving supplies areavailable in the office.

Default Preset MessagesDescription MessageMain This message is usually preset

to the Site Name.Access Granted Access code verified. Please

proceed with caution when gate isfully opened.

Bad Time Zone The facility is closed at this time.Please try again during normalhours.

Bad Keypad Zone Access to this area is not availablewith this number. Please seemanager.

Description MessageBad Password The number entered is not valid.

Please try again.Delinquent There is a question about your

account. Please contact themanager.

Hard Antipassback This code number shows no validentry. Please see the manager.

Soft Antipassback This code number shows no validentry. Please see the manager fordetails.

Description MessageDelivery There is a package for you in the

office. Please see the manager.Available The larger unit you requested is

available. Please see the manager.

Page 81: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ...................................................................................

2. Move In ..........................................................................................

3. Move Out .......................................................................................

4. Delinquent ......................................................................................

5. Transfer ..........................................................................................

6. Find ................................................................................................

7. Gate ................................................................................................

8. Reports ...........................................................................................

9. Utility .............................................................................................

10. Word Processing ...........................................................................

11. Arm/Disarm ..................................................................................

12. Site .................................................................................................

13. Exit ................................................................................................

14. DigiGate on the Taskbar Notification Area ................................

15. Options ..........................................................................................

Running DigiGate-700 for Windows

Renting a Unit

Vacating a Unit

Making Tenants Delinquent or Paid-up

Move or Copy a Tenant Record toAnother Unit

Finding/Editing unit or tenantinformation

Operating the Gate.

Unit ReportsMisc ReportsActivity Reports

System Controller UtilitiesData Utilities

DigiEditCreating Merge DocumentsMerge

Alarm ZoneArm/Disarm Unit

Selecting the Site in Remote Systems

Quitting the Program

IntroductionDigiGate icon function

LCD Keypad OptionPicture Option

Chapter 3

Operating Instructions

Page 82: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 2 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

IntroductionThis section deals with the operation of the DigiGate-700 for Windows program. The Setup button of theMain Menu was covered in Chapter 2. This chapter covers the other 12 buttons on the Main Menu toprovide a step by step guide of every operation in the program. This is the complete reference for normal useof the program. Once you have become familiar with the DigiGate-700 for Windows program, you can finda quick reference to the different operations in “Chapter 4, How Do I ...?”

If you have more than one site controlled by this software system, alwaysverify that you are connected to the correct site before manipulating tenantsor units. You can quickly locate this information in the center block of thestatus bar at the bottom of the Main Menu.

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Move Inbutton. Figure 3-1.

2. This will open the Select Unit to Move Inscreen. Figure 3-2.

3. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Numberfield and Click on the OK button to open theMove In Tenant window shown in Figure 3-5,Page 3-4.ORIf you want to find a vacant unit of the rightsize, Click on the Size field.

Figure 3-1Figure 3-2

Move In (Renting a Unit)Selecting a Unit

Page 83: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

5. This will open a list box of all vacant units forthat size code. Figure 3-4.

NOTE: From this list, you can view the codesfor the unit’s features, which should aid inselecting the correct type of unit for your newtenant.

6. Select a unit from the list and Click on the OKbutton.

4. This will open a list box of size codes. Selectone of the choices. Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3

Figure 3-4

Page 84: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 4 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. This will activate a screen for additionalTenant Information, Credit CardInformation, and Marketing Information.Figure 3-6.

NOTE: The information that you must enterhere depends on what was set as RequiredFields in Chapter 2, Page 2-11, and the fieldsyou have set up as Default Values in Chapter2, Page 2-12, will already be filled out.

2. When you have completed this screen, click onthe Access tab.

1. This will open the Move In Tenant windowwith the Tenant tab active. Figure 3-5.

NOTE: The information that you must enterhere depends on what was set as RequiredFields in Chapter 2, Page 2-11. The tenant’sLast Name is always required.The fields you have set up as Default Valuesin Chapter 2, Page 2-12, will already be filledout.

2. Enter the information desired.3. Click on the Misc tab.

*****************************************NOTE: If you have purchased the PictureOption, see the “Options” section at the end ofthis chapter for instructions on using the option.***************************************

Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6

Tenant Information Misc Information

Page 85: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. This will activate a screen for reviewing the unitinformation on the new tenant. Figure 3-8.

2. You may Click on the Display Graphicsbutton to highlight their unit on the Site Monitorif you have the DigiGraphics option. If theDigiGraphics option is not installed, the buttonwill be disabled.

3. When you are finished reviewing the unitinformation, Click on the Authorized tab.

*****************************************NOTE: If you have purchased the LCDKeypad Option, see the “Options” section atthe end of this chapter for instructions on usingthe option.***************************************

1. This activates the screen for AccessInformation, which is required. Figure 3-7.

2. Enter a unique Access Number and select aKeypad Zone and a Time Zone from the listboxes.

3. There are two Misc Options check boxes.The first allows you to prevent a tenant fromever being locked out or made delinquent. Youmay use this for Management units or for tradeouts for services, etc.

4. The second allows you to Tag a unit.

NOTE: A tagged unit (or tenant) will display asTagged on the Activity Log when the tenantenters or leaves the site. You can use thisfeature to denote VIP’s or problem tenants. Youmay also use this feature for any specialsituation where you want to be notified when atenant uses the keypads.

5. When you have completed this screen, Click onthe Unit tab.

Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8

Access Information Unit Information

Page 86: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 6 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. This activates a screen where you can keep anyother information you choose. Figure 3-10.

2. To add any Notes in the text area, Click in thetext area and type freely.

NOTE: There are two buttons just above thetext area. One appears as a calendar and willinsert the date at the cursor when Clicked. Thesecond is a clock and will insert the current timeat the cursor when Clicked.

3. When all the information has been entered,Click on the OK button to add the new tenant(s)and send the information to the DigiGate-700for Windows System Controller. The tenant(s)will then be able to use the Keypads to enteryour location.ORClick on the Cancel button. This opens theConfirm window with a prompt “Cancel MoveIn?” Click on the Yes button to return to theSelect Unit to Move In screen, Figure 3-2,Page 3-2, without moving the tenant in. Clickon the No button to return to the Move InTenants screen. Figure 3-10.

1. This activates a screen where you can add otherusers of the unit who will have a differentAccess Number. Figure 3-9.

2. Enter the First Name and Last Name in theappropriate fields.

3. Enter a unique Access Number.4. Select a Keypad Zone and a Time Zone from

the list boxes.

NOTE: The same system required fields alsoapply to Other Authorized Tenants. Theseare Last Name, Keypad Zone, Time Zone,and a unique Access Code.

5. Click the Add button to add the new tenant tothe list at the bottom of the screen. You can addas many tenants as you choose to the unit.

6. When you are done, Click on the Notes tab.

****************************************NOTE: If you have purchased the PictureOption, see the “Options” section at the end ofthis chapter for instructions on using the option.***************************************

Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10

Authorized Information Notes

Page 87: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

3. This will open the Select units to linkwindow. Figure 3-12.

4. Select a unit from the list by Clicking on theline in the list box showing the unit number.

5. Link the unit by Clicking on the Add button.6. You can continue to link as many units as

needed to this tenant’s record.7. Click on the Exit button when you have

completed this operation.

1. When you Click on the OK button, Figure 3-10,Page 3-6, the program gives you theopportunity to link additional units to the tenantby opening the Confirm window. Figure 3-11.

2. Click on the NO button to simply add the newtenant, or Click on Yes to link additional unitsto this tenant.

Figure 3-11Figure 3-12

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windows program will allow you to rent multiple units to the same tenantand allow the tenant to use one access code for all the units rented. This is called “Linking” units. All of theunits that are linked will contain the same tenant information. Units can be linked at the time of move in,which is explained here; or added to the tenant’s account at a later time, explained later in this chapter in the“Transfer” section.

Linking Units

Page 88: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 8 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2. This will open the Select Unit to Move Outscreen. Figure 3-14.

3. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Numberfield and Click on the OK button to open theMove Out Tenant window. Figure 3-16,Page 3-9.ORIf you want to find a tenant by last name, Clickon the Last Name field and enter all or part ofthe tenant’s last name and Click on the OKbutton.

NOTE: You can type a space in this field andClick on the OK button to list all tenants.

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Move Outbutton. Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13Figure 3-14

Move Out (Vacating a Unit)

Page 89: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 9DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

5. This will open the Move Out Tenant windowwith the Tenant tab active. Figure 3-16.

NOTE: All information here has been disabled(you cannot edit any information), the view isonly to let you verify that you have selected thecorrect tenant.

6. Click on the OK button if this is the tenant youwant to move out, or the Cancel button toreturn to the Select Unit to Move Out screen.Figure 3-14, Page 3-8.

4. This will open a list of tenants with their unitnumbers. Select one of the choices and, Clickon the OK button. Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16

Page 90: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 10 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

9. If this unit is Linked with any other unit(s), theConfirm window will appear asking if youwant to “Move out linked units?”Figure 3-18.

10. Click Yes to vacate all linked units for thistenant, or No to vacate just the selected unit.

7. Clicking on the OK button, Figure 3-16, Page3-9, will open the Confirm window, Figure3-17, if Verify Prompts is set to Yes in theUser IDs setup.

8. Click Yes to vacate the selected unit or No toreturn to the Move Out Tenant window.

Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18

Page 91: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 11DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open a list of tenants with their unitnumbers. Select one of the choices and Clickon the OK button. Figure 3-20.

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-13, Page 3-8,Click on the Delinquent button.

2. This will open the Select unit to makedelinquent or paid up screen. Figure 3-19.

3. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Numberfield and Click on the OK button to open theMake Tenant Delinquent window,Figure 3-21, Page 3-12, or the Make TenantPaid Up window, Figure 3-23, Page 3-13.ORIf you want to find a tenant by last name, Clickon the Last Name field and enter all or part ofthe tenant’s last name and Click on the OKbutton.

NOTE: You can type a space in this field andClick on the OK button to list all tenants.

Figure 3-19

Figure 3-20

Delinquent (Making a Tenant Delinquent or Paid Up)This selection on the Main Menu is used to mark tenant accounts delinquent or to make them current. Thestatus of the unit selected will determine which screen is shown. i.e. If the tenant is delinquent, a screen tomake them Paid Up will display. If the unit is paid up, a screen to make them Delinquent will display.

Selecting a Unit or Tenant

Page 92: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 12 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

3. If you Clicked the OK button, the Confirmwindow, Figure 3-22, will open if VerifyPrompts is set to Yes in the User IDs setup.

4. Click Yes to make the selected unit delinquent,or No to return to the Make TenantDelinquent window.

1. After making the selection, Figure 3-20, Page 3-11, the tenant screen will open with one of twotitles, depending on the state of the unit. If theunit’s status is Rented, the Make TenantDelinquent window will open. Figure 3-21.

NOTE: All information here has been disabled(you cannot edit any information), the view isonly to let you verify that you have selected thecorrect tenant.

2. Click on the OK button if this is the tenant youwant to make delinquent, or the Cancel buttonto return to the Select unit to makedelinquent or paid up window.

Figure 3-21

Figure 3-22

Making Tenants Delinquent

Page 93: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 13DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Verify Prompts is set to Yes in the User IDssetup.

4. Click Yes to make the selected unit paid up, orNo to return to the Make Tenant Paid Upwindow.

1. After making the selection, Figure 3-20, Page 3-11, the tenant screen will open with one of twotitles depending on the state of the unit. If theunit’s status is Delinquent, the Make TenantPaid Up window will open. Figure 3-23.

NOTE: All information here has been disabled(you cannot edit any information), the view isonly to let you verify that you have selected thecorrect tenant.

2. Click on the OK button if this is the tenant youwant to pay up, or the Cancel button to returnto the Select unit to make delinquent orpaid up window.

3. The Confirm window, Figure 3-24, will open if

Figure 3-23

Figure 3-24

Making Tenants Paid Up

Page 94: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 14 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2. This will open the Transfer Unit screen.Figure 3-26.

3. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Numberfield and Click on the OK button to open theSelect units to transfer/copy to window,Figure 3-28, Page 3-15.ORIf you want to find a tenant by last name, Clickon the Last Name field and enter all or part ofthe tenant’s last name and Click on the OKbutton.

NOTE: You can type a space in this field andClick on the OK button to list all tenants.

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-25, Click onthe Transfer button.

Figure 3-25Figure 3-26

Transfer (Move/Copy Tenant Record to Another Unit)This selection on the Main Menu is used to move a tenant from one unit to another or to link one or moreadditional units to a tenant. When we use the term “Copy,” we are referring to “Linking.” When units arelinked, they carry the same information on the tenant since they are all retrieving the same tenant record.Therefore, if the tenant information is changed in one unit record, the change will be automatic in all otherunits linked to the tenant. The only way that a link can be removed is to move the tenant out of one or moreunits in the linked group.

Page 95: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 15DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

5. The Select units to transfer/copy towindow will open. Figure 3-28.

NOTE: The unit you selected from the screenin Figure 3-26, Page 3-14, or Figure 3-27 is thesource unit, or unit you are copying from ormoving. Next you are going to select the targetunit, or unit that the information is going to becopied or moved to in Figure 3-28.

6. Select a unit by clicking on the line showingthat unit.

7. Click on the Link button, Figure 3-28, if youwant to copy the information to the selectedunit.

NOTE: The tenant will now occupy both units.

4. This will open a list of tenants with their unitnumbers. Select one of the choices and Clickon the OK button. Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27Figure 3-28

Page 96: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 16 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

10. Click on the Transfer button, Figure 3-30, ifyou want to move the tenant from one unit toanother.

NOTE: The tenant is moved out of the old orSource unit and moved into the new or Targetunit.

8. The Confirm window, Figure 3-29, will open ifVerify Prompts is set to Yes in the User IDssetup.

9. Click Yes to link the selected unit, or No toreturn to the Select units to transfer/copyto screen.

NOTE: You may repeat this process to link asmany units as necessary.

Figure 3-29Figure 3-30

Page 97: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 17DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

13. Click on the Done button to return to the MainMenu. Figure 3-32.

11. The Confirm window, Figure 3-31, will open ifVerify Prompts is set to Yes in the User IDssetup.

12. Click Yes to transfer the tenant and return tothe Main Menu, or No to return to the Selectunits to transfer/copy to screen withouttransferring the tenant.

Figure 3-31Figure 3-32

Page 98: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 18 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2. This will open the Find Unit screen.Figure 3-34.

3. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Numberfield and Click on the OK button to open theFind/Edit Unit Information window.Figure 3-36, Page 3-19.ORIf you want to find a tenant by last name, clickon the Last Name field and enter all or part ofthe tenant’s last name and click on the OKbutton.

NOTE: You can type a space in this field andclick on the OK button to list all tenants.

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Findbutton. Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33Figure 3-34

Find (Finding/Editing Unit or Tenant Information)This selection on the Main Menu is used to find tenants or units and edit the tenant information. In general,the instructions here will follow those in the “Move In” section of this chapter.NOTE: If the fields on this screen are dimmed grey and you cannot edit any information, the fields havebeen disabled. Check the title bar of the window for the phrase “RECORD LOCKED.” If you see this, theinformation on the screen may be viewed but you may not edit. The normal reason for this is that thedatabase record being accessed is in use in another part of the program or by another user, if you are workingon a network. If your system is not on a network, close all open windows and try to access the data again. Ifthis fails, close the program entirely, restart the program and try to access the record again.

Page 99: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 19DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

5. This will open the Find/Edit UnitInformation window with the Tenant tabactive. Figure 3-36.

NOTE: The information that you must enterhere depends on what was set as “RequiredFields” in “Chapter 2, Page 2-11.” The tenant’sLast Name is always required.

6. Change the information desired.7. Click on the Misc tab.

***************************************NOTE: If you have purchased the PictureOption, see the “Options” section at the end ofthis chapter for instructions on using the option.***************************************

4. This will open a list of tenants with their unitnumbers. Select one of the choices and click onthe OK button. Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35Figure 3-36

Page 100: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 20 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

11. This activates the screen for AccessInformation, which is required. Figure 3-38.

12. Change the information desired.13. When you have completed this screen, click on

the Unit tab.

***************************************NOTE: If you have purchased the LCDKeypad Option, see the “Options” section atthe end of this chapter for instructions on usingthe option.***************************************

8. This will activate a screen for additionalTenant Information, Credit CardInformation, and Marketing Information.Figure 3-37.

9. Change the information desired.10. When you have completed this screen, click on

the Access tab.

Figure 3-37 Figure 3-38

Page 101: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 21DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

17. This activates a screen where you can{Add | Edit | Delete} other users of the unit whowill have different Access Codes.Figure 3-40.

18. To edit the information for an Other Authorizedtenant, Select the tenant from the OtherAuthorized Tenants list box.

19. Change the information displayed in the OtherAuthorized area of the screen.

20. Click on the Update button.21. The Confirm window, Figure 3-42, Page 3-22,

will open with a “Save Modifications”prompt.

22. Click on the Yes button to change the data orthe No button to cancel the update.

***************************************NOTE: If you have purchased the PictureOption, see the “Options” section at the end ofthis chapter for instructions on using the option.***************************************

14. This will activate a screen for reviewing the unitinformation on the tenant. Figure 3-39.

NOTE: This screen is only for viewing theinformation. See” Modifying Units,” Page 2-41in Chapter 2, to change the unit information.

15. Click on the Display Graphics button tohighlight their unit on the Site Monitor if youhave the DigiGraphics option.

16. When you are finished reviewing the unitinformation, Click on the Authorized tab.

Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40

Page 102: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 22 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

28. The Confirm window, Figure 3-42, will openwith a “Save Modifications” prompt.

29. Click on the Yes button to update the data orthe No button to cancel the update.

30. To delete an Authorized tenant, select the tenantfrom the Other Authorized Tenants list box.Figure 3-41

31. Click on the Delete button.32. The Confirm window, Figure 3-43, will open

with a “Remove other authorized”prompt.

33. Click on the Yes button to delete the tenant orthe No button to cancel the operation.

34. When you are done, Click on the Notes tab.

23. To add a new Authorized Tenant to the listClick on the New button. Figure 3-41.

24. This will add a new record to the OtherAuthorized Tenants list box and blank thefields in the Other Authorized area of thescreen.

25. Enter the First Name and Last Name in theappropriate fields and a unique Access Code.

26. Select a Keypad Zone and a Time Zone fromthe list boxes.

NOTE: The same system required fields alsoapply to Other Authorized Tenants. Theseare Last Name, Keypad Zone, Time Zone,and a unique Access Code.

27. Click the Update button to add the new tenantto the list at the bottom of the screen. You canadd as many tenants as you choose to the unit.

Figure 3-41

Figure 3-42

Figure 3-43

Page 103: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 23DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

38. The Confirm window, Figure 3-45, will openwith a “Change tenant information”prompt.

39. Click on the Yes button to change the data orthe No button to return to the Find/Edit screen.Figure 3-44.

NOTE: Changes, {Add | Edit | Delete},made in the Authorized tab section, cause animmediate update to the AUTHORIZEDdatabase and are not affected by the{OK | Cancel } selection, Figure 3-44, or the{Yes | No } selection, Figure 3-45.All other modifications done in the other fivetabbed sections are updated or discarded basedon the selections made in these two choices.

35. This activates the text area where you can addto or edit any of the information there.Figure 3-44.

36. To edit the Notes in the text area, Click in thetext area and type freely.

NOTE: There are two buttons just above thetext area. One appears as a calendar and willinsert the date at the cursor when Clicked. Thesecond is a clock and will insert the current timeat the cursor when Clicked.

37. When all the information has been entered,Click on the OK button to update the tenant’sinformation and send it to the DigiGate-700 forWindows System Controller.ORClick on the Cancel button to return to theFind Unit screen. Figure 3-35, Page 3-19.

Figure 3-44

Figure 3-45

Page 104: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 24 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2. This will open the Open Gates window.Figure 3-47.

3. The Select action to perform radio buttonshave three options: Open, Hold Open, andClose which are described above. Select oneof these. Figure 3-47.

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Gatebutton. Figure 3-46.

Figure 3-46

Figure 3-47

Gate (Operate the Gate)The Gate option on the main menu opens one window and allows you to open the gate (run through normalopen/close sequence), hold the gate open (lock the gate in the open position), and close a gate that has beenheld open.Only two decisions need be made: which action to take, and which gate to take it on.

Page 105: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 25DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

5. Click on the OK button to perform the selectedopening or closing. Figure 3-49.

4. Click on the Select control point to openlist box and Select one of the choices.Figure 3-48.

NOTE: The “Gate One,” “Gate Two,” etc. inthe list are Control Points, not gates on yoursite. Control points are usually associated withKeypads or other entry devices. The gate onyour site that normally opens when you use theentry device, is the one that will open when thatcontrol point is chosen. For example, you havetwo keypads at your main gate: an entry keypadthat is assigned to the “Gate One” control point,and an exit keypad that is assigned to the “GateTwo” control point. Selecting either of thesecontrol points will open the main gate at yourlocation, since using either of these keypadswill open the gate.

Figure 3-48 Figure 3-49

Page 106: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 26 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. The report display window, Figure 3-50, holdsfour groups of buttons and a Close buttonabove the report viewing area of the window.

2. The first group, Figure 3-51, controls the size ofthe report page image in the window.

3. Click on the first or left button to make theentire report page fit in the window.

4. Click on the second or center button to makethe report page full size. There will be verticaland horizontal scroll bars to move the report inthe window. Figure 3-51.

5. Click on the third or right button to make thereport page fit to the width of the window.There will be a horizontal scroll bar to move thereport up and down in the window. Figure 3-50.

6. The second group, Figure 3-52, controls thepage of the report displayed for reports withmultiple pages.

7. Click on the first or left button to go to the firstpage of the report. Figure 3-52.

8. Click on the second button (left facing arrow) togo back one page or to the prior page of thereport. Figure 3-52.

9. Click on the third button (right facing arrow) togo forward one page or to the next page of thereport. Figure 3-52.

10. Click on the last or right button to go to the lastpage of the report. Figure 3-52.

ReportsThe Reports option on the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24, is the method you will use to display andprint the information about your tenants and their renting preferences, your units, and other information youhave gathered.Each report, when run, will first display on the screen in a report display window which is consistentthroughout this section. Each report window will be titled with the report title. Also, in each window arecontrols to change the display and print the report.

Figure 3-50

Figure 3-51

Figure 3-52

Viewing Reports

Page 107: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 27DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. The third group, Figure 3-53, controls theprinting of the report displayed.

2. Click on the first or left button for printer setup.Figure 3-53.

3. This opens the Windows 95 Print window.Figure 3-54. Here you can Select the printer touse, the range of pages to print, and the numberof copies of each page to print.

4. Click on the OK button to accept the selection,or on the Cancel button to abandon theselection. Figure 3-54.

5. Click on the last or right button, Figure 3-53, toprint the report.

6. The Windows 95 Printing progress windowwill open and show the progress of the report.Figure 3-55.

7. Click on the Cancel button to abort printing.

Figure 3-54

Figure 3-55

Printing Reports

Figure 3-53

Page 108: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 28 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-57

Figure 3-58

1. The fourth group, Figure 3-56, controls thesaving of the report displayed and opening filessaved previously.

2. Click on the first or left button, Figure 3-56.3. This opens the Save As window. Figure 3-57.4. Type the name you want to save the report as in

the File Name field.5. Click on the Save button to save the report or

the Cancel button to abandon the operation.Figure 3-57.

6. To open a report saved previously, Click on thelast or right button, Figure 3-56.

7. This will open the Windows 95 Open window.(Figure 3-58).

8. Select an existing file in the list by Clicking onit.

9. Click on the Open button.10. This will open the Report Display window

with the selected report on the screen.Figure 3-50, Page 3-26.

Saving and Opening Saved Reports

Figure 3-56

Page 109: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 29DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-60

1. The report page has certain common elementsfor all reports generated.

2. Figure 3-59 shows the report header.3. In the header, the first line is the Site name.

The second line is the report title and the third isthe column headings for the report.Figure 3-59.

4. Figure 3-60 shows the report footer.5. The report footer displays the date and time the

report was generated, the site software’s serialnumber, and the page number. Figure 3-60.

6. Any totals are displayed on the last page of thereport, below the columns and above the date,time, etc. Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-59

Common Elements of Reports

Page 110: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 30 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-61 Figure 3-62

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-61.

2. Click on the Delinquent Units button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Delinquent Units and run theDelinquent Units report. Figure 3-62.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,First Name, Last Name, Home Phone,Work Phone, and Price.

5. The totals at the end of the report are:Total Units (listed in the report) andTotal Rent/Month (for the listed units).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Delinquent Units

This section now shows how to run the Unit Reports and looks at the format of each report. The controlsfor each of the reports in the display window are identical and have been explained completely in the previouspages. When the Report Menu opens, the Unit Reports tab is active.

Unit Reports

Page 111: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 31DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-63Figure 3-64

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-63.

2. Click on the All Units button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of All Units and run the All Unitsreport. Figure 3-64.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,Size, Sq. Feet, Price, and Status.

NOTE: The Status field will be:V for VacantR for RentedD for DelinquentU for Damaged or Unrentable

5. The total at the end of the report is: TotalUnits (listed in the report).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

All Units

Page 112: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 32 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-65Figure 3-66

1. From the Main Menu,Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-65.

2. Click on the Rented Units button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Rented Units and run the RentedUnits report. Figure 3-66.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,First Name, Last Name, Company, andStatus. The Status value is shown as R forRented or D for Delinquent.

5. The total at the end of the report is: TotalUnits (listed in the report).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Rented Units

Page 113: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 33DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-67Figure 3-68

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-67.

2. Click on the Vacant Units button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Vacant Units and run theVacant Units report. Figure 3-68.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,Size, Sq. Feet, Height, Price, andVacant Since.

5. The totals at the end of the report are:Total Units (listed in the report)Total Rent/Month (for the listed units).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Vacant Units

Page 114: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 34 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-69Figure 3-70

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-69.

2. Click on the Linked Units button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Linked Units and run theLinked Units report. Figure 3-70.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit, andLinked Unit.

5. The are NO totals at the end of the report.6. Click on the Close button to return to the

Report Menu.

Linked Units

Page 115: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 35DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-71 Figure 3-72

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-71.

2. Click on the Damaged Units button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Unrentable Units and run theDamaged Units report. Figure 3-72.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,Size, Sq. Feet, Door Type, Floor,Price, and Date the unit was markeddamaged.

5. The total at the end of the report is:Total Units (listed in the report).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Damaged Units

Page 116: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 36 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-73Figure 3-74

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-73.

2. Click on the Marketing button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Marketing and run theMarketing report. Figure 3-74.

4. The rows displayed here are: Drive By,Previous Tenant, Referral, andYellow Pages.

5. The report will list the totals for all MarketingCode categories set up in Chapter 2, Page 2-16.

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Marketing

Page 117: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 37DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-75 Figure 3-76

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-75.

2. Click on the Authorized button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Authorized Tenants and run theAuthorized Tenants report. Figure 3-76.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,First Name, Last Name, AccessNumber, Time Zone, and Keypad Zone.

5. The total at the end of the report is:Total Units (listed in the report).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Authorized

Page 118: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 38 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-77Figure 3-78

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-77.

2. Click on the Never Locked button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Never Locked Units and run theNever Locked Units report. Figure 3-78.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,First Name, Last Name, and CompanyName.

5. The totals at the end of the report are:Total Units (listed in the report).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Never Locked

Page 119: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 39DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-77, Page 3-38.

2. Click on the Custom Report button.3. This will open the Custom Report window

with the Unit Info tab active. Figure 3-79.

NOTE: The fields on this and the Tenant Infoscreen allow you to filter or select records basedon the fields. Selecting a value in one of thefields allows only units or tenants that have theselected value. This allows you to be veryspecific in the tenants or units you select. Forexample: You could design a report to list alldelinquent tenants in 10x10 units who rentedbecause they were previous tenants and whoselected Deans & Homer Insurance. This mayseem far fetched but shows the detail that maybe designed into this report.

4. Select the Unit Status you want and values forany of the other fields on this page.

5. Click on the Tenant Info tab.6. If you have selected Vacant or All in the Unit

Info box, an Information window appearsstating that Tenant Info is not available forVacant Units or All Units. Figure 3-80.

7. Click on the OK button.8. This will return you to the Unit Info window.

Custom Report

Figure 3-79

Figure 3-80

Page 120: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 40 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-81Figure 3-82

9. Click on the Tenant Info tab. Figure 3-81.8. The Tenant Info window will be shown where

you may Select values to limit the selectionfurther for the report. Figure 3-81.

9. When all selections have been made, Click onthe OK button to run and display the report orthe Cancel button to abandon the operation.

10. Clicking on the OK button, Figure 3-81, will

open the report display window with the title ofCustom Report and run the CustomReport. Figure 3-82.

11. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,First Name, Last Name, Home Phone,and Work Phone.

12. The total at the end of the report is:Total Units (listed in the report).

13. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Page 121: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 41DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-83Figure 3-84

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-83.

2. Click on the Days Vacant button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Number of days units vacantand run the Days Vacant report. Figure 3-84.

4. The columns displayed here are: Unit,Vacant Since (Date), Rent (Amount), andNumber Days (Vacant).

5. The totals at the end of the report are:Total Units (listed in the report)Total Rent/Month (for the listed units).

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Days Vacant

Page 122: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 42 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-85 Figure 3-86

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Figure 3-85.

2. Click on the Mailing Labels button.

3. This will open the Mailing Labels windowwith the Unit Info tab active. Figure 3-86.NOTE: The fields on this and the Tenant Infoscreen allow you to filter or select records basedon the fields. Selecting a value in one of thefields allows only units or tenants that have theselected value. This allows you to be veryspecific in the tenants or units you select.

4. Select the Tenant Status you want and a valuefor Unit Size if you want to limit the labelsselected to a specific size unit.

5. Click on the Tenant Info tab.

Mailing Labels

Page 123: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 43DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-87Figure 3-88

6. The Tenant Info window will be shown whereyou may Select values to limit the selectionfurther for the report. Figure 3-87.

7. When all selections have been made, Click onthe OK button to run and display the report orthe Cancel button to abandon the operation.

8. Clicking on the OK button, Figure 3-87, willopen the report display window with the title ofLabels and run the mailing label report.Figure 3-88.

9. The labels are listed or printed, if you select, ina 3 across format on 1” x 2 5/8” labels. (Avery5160 or equivalent.)

10. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Page 124: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 44 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-89Figure 3-90

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Click on the Misc Reportstab. Figure 3-89.

2. Click on the Mux/Slot button.

NOTE: This report is only valid for sites thathave individual Door Alarms.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Mux/Slot Report and run theMux/Slot Report. Figure 3-90.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,Mux Number, Slot, and Status. (A forArmed or D for Disarmed)

5. There are no totals for this report.6. Click on the Close button to return to the

Report Menu.

Misc Reports

Mux/Slot

This section shows how to run the Misc Reports and looks at the format of each report. The controls foreach of the reports in the display window are identical and have been explained completely at the beginningof this chapter. When the Report Menu opens, the Unit Reports tab is active. Click on the MiscReports tab to activate it.

Page 125: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 45DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-91

Figure 3-92

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Click on the Misc Reportstab. Figure 3-91.

2. Click on the Setup Info. button.

NOTE: The Setup Info is a series of reportsthat show your system configuration and printas a batch. It is a good idea to print and storethese reports after your system is set up andrunning properly. The information these reportscontain can aid our Service Department inresolving any problems that may occur at a laterdate.

3. This will open the Confirm window with theprompt Print setup information.Figure 3-92.

4. Click on the Yes button to print the reports oron the No button to return to the ReportMenu.

5. Clicking on the Yes button will open theWindows 95 Print window where you canselect printers, etc.

6. After making printer and page selections, Clickon the OK button to print the reports or on theCancel button to return to the Report Menu.

7. Clicking on the OK button will open thePrinting progress window with a progressbar and prompt to show the status of the printjob. Figure 3-93.

8. Clicking on the Cancel button will stop outputto the printer and return you to the ReportMenu.

Setup Info

Figure 3-93

Page 126: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 46 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Onsite1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,

Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Click on the ActivityReports tab.Figure 3-94.

2. Click on the Onsite button.

3. This will open the report display window withthe title of Tenant Onsite Report and run theTenants Onsite Report. Figure 3-95.

4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number,Tenant Name, Area, and Count (number oftimes the code has been used for entry withoutbeing used for exit. May denote tailgating.)

5. The total at the end of the report is:Total Units (listed in the report.)

6. Click on the Close button to return to theReport Menu.

Figure 3-94Figure 3-95

Activity ReportsThis section shows how to run the Activity Reports and looks at the format of each report. The controls foreach of the reports in the display window are identical and have been explained completely at the beginningof this chapter. When the Report Menu opens, the Unit Reports tab is active. Click on the ActivityReports tab to activate it.

Page 127: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 47DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-96Figure 3-97

1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Click on the ActivityReports tab. Figure 3-96.

2. Click on the Activity Log button.

3. This will open the Select activities to bedisplayed window with the Activity tabactive. Figure 3-97.

4. You can select the types of activity that youwant to include in the report by Selecting(checking) or Deselecting (unchecking) any ofthe check boxes on this screen.

5. The All and None buttons will Select or Clearall the check boxes respectively.

6. When all selections are made, Click on theCriteria tab.

Activity Log

Page 128: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 48 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-98

Figure 3-99

7. This opens the Criteria window where you canselect a specific Unit Number or a date rangefor the activities on the report. Figure 3-98.

8. To limit the report to a specific unit, type a validunit number into the Unit Number field.Figure 3-98.

9. To enter a date range, Select the month, day, oryear and type your choice or Click on the downarrow to the right of the Starting Date field.Figure 3-98.

10. This will open the calendar. Figure 3-99. Thecurrent date is shown at the bottom of thewindow.

11. At the top of the window are left and rightarrow buttons. Click on these to change themonth, backward and forward, respectively.

12. Click on the correct day.13. Repeat steps 9-12 for the Ending Date field.14. When all selections have been made, Click on

the OK button to run the report or on theCancel button to abandon the operation.

15. This will open the report display window withthe title of Activity Log and run theActivity Log report. Figure 3-100.

16. The columns displayed are: Date, Time,Unit, Password, Name, Input Point, andActivity.

17. There are no totals for this report.18. Click on the Close button to return to the

Report Menu.

Figure 3-100

Page 129: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 49DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-101 Figure 3-102

Transactions1. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,

Click on the Report button to open the ReportMenu window. Click on the ActivityReports tab. Figure 3-101.

2. Click on the Transactions button.

3. This will open the Transaction Log windowwith the Activities tab active. Figure 3-102.

4. You can select the types of activity that youwant to include in the report by Selecting(checking) or Deselecting (unchecking) any ofthe check boxes on this screen.

5. The All and None buttons will select or Clearall the check boxes respectively.

6. When all selections are made, Click on theCriteria tab.

Page 130: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 50 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-105

7. This opens the Criteria window where you canselect a specific date range, User ID, or a UnitNumber for the transactions on the report.Figure 3-103.

8. To limit the report to a specific unit, type a validunit number into the Unit Number field.Figure 3-103.

9. To limit the report to a specific User, select oneof the users from the User ID list box.

10. To enter a date range, select the month, day, oryear and type your choice or Click on the downarrow to the right of the Starting Date field.Figure 3-103.

11. This will open the calendar. Figure 3-104. Thecurrent date is shown at the bottom of thewindow.

12. At the top of the window there are left and rightarrow buttons. Click on these to change themonth, backward and forward, respectively.

13. Click on the correct day.14. Repeat steps 10-13 for the Ending Date field.15. When all selections have been made, Click on

the OK button to run the report or on theCancel button to abandon the operation.

16. This will open the report display window withthe title of Transaction Report and run theTransaction Log report. Figure 3-105.

17. The columns displayed are: Date, Time,Unit, Tenant Name, User, andTransaction Type.

18. There are no totals for this report.19. Click on the Close button to return to the

Report Menu.

Figure 3-103

Figure 3-104

Page 131: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 51DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-107Figure 3-106

1. From the Utility Menu with the SystemController tab active, Click on the ClearSysCon button. Figure 3-106.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for WindowsSystem Controller (SysCon) is the heart of thesystem and performs the access control.Clearing the SysCon removes ALLprogramming from the controller.

Warning: this action should not be performedunless directed by a Service Technician.

2. This will open the Confirm window with aprompt of “Clear System Controller?”Figure 3-107.

3. Click on the Yes button to clear the SysCon oron the No button to abandon the operation.

NOTE: To restore the System Controller afterdoing a Clear SysCon, do Set Controller,then Download All. Pages 3-52 and 3-53.

System Controller Utilities

UtilityThis section deals with System Controller utilities and Data Utilities. The following utilities are routinesthat you may use to control and perform minor maintenance to your DigiGate-700 for Windows system.Each button on the Utility Menu performs a specific task which will be explained in the following pages.For all of the following, we will assume that you have Clicked on the Utility button on the Main Menu,Figure 3-46, Page 3-24, and that the Utility Menu window is active.

Clear SysCon

Page 132: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 52 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-108 Figure 3-109

Set Controller

1. From the Utility Menu with the SystemController tab active, Click on the SetController button. Figure 3-108.

NOTE: Setting the DigiGate-700 forWindows System Controller (SysCon) transfersall programming and site settings back to theSysCon from the data files on your hard disk.This sets the controller to act in the way youdecided in Chapter 2.

2. This will open the Set System Controllerwindow. Figure 3-109.

3. Click on the OK button to set the SysCon or onthe Cancel button to abandon the operation.

4. In the two data areas at the top of the screen,you will see the operation being performed, andthe information being transferred.Figure 3-109.

5. When the operation has been completed, youwill return to the Utility Menu.

NOTE: When the operation has beencompleted, you will see several entries in theActivity Log dealing with Zones Armed, BoardsOnline, Tamper, etc. The exact list isdetermined by your system setup.

Page 133: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 53DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-110 Figure 3-111

Download All1. From the Utility Menu with the System

Controller tab active, click on the DownloadAll button. Figure 3-110.

NOTE: This operation transfers all tenantinformation to the System Controller. Theinformation includes the password, time zone,keypad zone, etc. This sets the controller forthe access conditions you have chosen for eachindividual tenant.

2. This will open the Download All Unitswindow. Figure 3-111.

3. Click on the OK button to download the rentedunits or on the Cancel button to abandon theoperation.

4. You will see the operation being performed andthe unit numbers for the information beingtransferred in the two data areas at the top of thescreen. Figure 3-111.

5. When the operation has been completed, youwill return to the Utility Menu.

Page 134: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 54 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-112 Figure 3-113

Clear Areas1. From the Utility Menu with the System

Controller tab active, Click on the ClearAreas button. Figure 3-112.

NOTE: This routine clears all of the tenantsfrom the control area you select. This willremove any tenants that the System Controllerlists as onsite. It will also clear the Graphicsscreen of blinking on site tenants if you have theDigiGraphics option. Also, if you have hadyour installer set the AntiPassBack optionto Hard, any tenants in the area cleared WILLNOT be able to use the keypads to open the exitgate.

2. This will open the Clear Control Areaswindow. Figure 3-113.

3. All control areas defined in your system setup,will be listed in the white data area on thescreen. Select (Check) or Deselect (Uncheck)these control areas as needed.

NOTE: The All and None buttons on thisscreen will Select or Deselect all control areasrespectively.

4. Click on the OK button to clear the area or onthe Cancel button to abandon the operation.

5. When the operation has been completed, youwill return to the Utility Menu.

Page 135: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 55DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-114

Figure 3-115

Version1. From the Utility Menu with the System

Controller tab active, Click on the Versionbutton. Figure 3-114.

2. This will open the Version Informationwindow. Figure 3-115.

3. This screen displays the software version, theSysCon chip version, and the path to all datafiles in the system.

4. Click on the OK button to return to the UtilityMenu.

Page 136: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 56 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-116

Date/Time1. From the Utility Menu with the System

Controller tab active, Click on the Date/Timebutton. Figure 3-116.

NOTE: This screen allows you to change thedate and time in both the PC and the SysCon.

2. This will open the Set System ControllerTime window. Figure 3-117.

3. To change the time, Select the hours, minutes,seconds, or AM/PM and use the spinner arrowsat the right of the field to increase or decreasethe numbers.

4. To change the date, Select the month, day, oryear and type your choice or Click on the downarrow to the right of the Date field.Figure 3-117.

5. This will open the calendar. Figure 3-118. Thecurrent date is shown at the bottom of thewindow.

6. At the top of the window are left and rightarrow buttons. Click on these to change themonth, backward and forward, respectively.

7. Click on the correct day.8. When all selections have been made, Click on

the OK button to update the date/time or theCancel button to abandon the operation andreturn to the Utility Menu.

Figure 3-117

Figure 3-118

Page 137: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 57DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-119

Figure 3-120

Activity Log1. From the Utility Menu with the System

Controller tab active, Click on the ActivityLog button. Figure 3-119.

2. This will open the DigiGate Activity Logwindow. Figure 3-120.

3. This allows you to view the activity that hasoccurred at your location. The actual windowdisplayed can be changed in the “Setup”section, Chapter 2, Page 2-9, to modify thenumber of activities or the length of time thewindow remains active.

Page 138: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 58 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-121 Figure 3-122

Clear Graphics1. From the Utility Menu with the System

Controller tab active, Click on theClr Graphics button. Figure 3-121.

NOTE: This operation only applies to systemsthat have the DigiGraphics option.

This option removes the solid highlighting thatwas created in the Find selection, Page 3-18and 3-19.

2. No other window is opened in this operation.The Graphics display should be cleared ofhighlighting and the Utility Menu remainsactive.

NOTE: Flashing “Tenants on Site”highlights can only be cleared with ClearControl Area. See Page 3-54.

1. From the Utility Menu with the SystemController tab active, Click on theAccess Code button. Figure 3-121

NOTE: This operation retrieves theinformation stored in the SysCon, which can beused for diagnostics and compared to theinformation stored in the databases.

2. This opens the System Controller AccessCodes window with a prompt of “Pleasewait, Retrieving informationfrom System Controller”. Figure 3-122.

3. This window remains open while theinformation is being retrieved.

Access Code

Page 139: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 59DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-123 Figure 3-124

4. When the information is retrieved completely,the center of the window is replaced with a grid.The columns displayed are Unit, Last Name,Access Code, Time Zone, Keypad Zone,and Status. Figure 3-123.

5. By default, only rented units are displayed.Select the Display Vacants check box (lowerright area of the screen) to include theinformation for vacant units in the listing.

6. You can use the scroll bar on the right to scanthe information.

7. Click on the Print button to print a listing ofthis information to the screen or on the Closebutton to return to the Utility Menu.

8. Clicking on the Print button, Figure 3-123,opens the report display window with the titleof Access Codes Retrieved from SystemController and runs the Access CodesRetrieved from SystemController report. Figure 3-124.

9. The columns displayed are: Unit, LastName, Access Code, Time Zone, KeypadZone, and Status. Figure 3-124.

10. The totals at the end of the report are:Total Units (listed in the report)

11. Click on the Printer icon button to print thereport.

12. Click on the Close button to return to theUtility Menu.

Page 140: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 60 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-125

Figure 3-126

Backup

1. From the Utility Menu with the Data Utilitiestab active, Click on the Backup button.Figure 3-125.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for WindowsSystem uses Microsoft Backup. See “Chapter5, Backing up your data” and your WindowsUser Guide for a complete description ofMicrosoft Backup.

2. This will open the Microsoft Backup windowwith a prompt of “Back up: SiteOne,”“SiteOne” being the backup set shipped with theDigiGate-700 for Windows program, and asecond line prompt of “A backup isabout to begin, would you liketo continue?” Figure 3-126.

3. Click on the Yes button to start the backup oron the No button to abandon the operation.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowsdefault profile for backup is “SiteOne.SET.”The default backup drive for this profile is theA: floppy drive. The backup file created on thefloppy drive is “SiteOne_xx.Qic,” where “xx” isa numeric value denoting the number of thebackup file created, “SiteOne_00.Qic,”“SiteOne_01.Qic,” etc.

If SiteOne.SET is not present, go to Chapter 5and follow the instructions to create a backupset.

Data Utilities

Page 141: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 61DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-127Figure 3-128

Restore

1. When you Click on the Restore button,Figure 3-127, a Warning window is displayedfor the reason listed above.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windowsprogram uses Microsoft Backup. See “Chapter5, Backing up your data” and your WindowsUser Guide for a complete description ofMicrosoft Backup.

2. Click on the Yes button to close the program,or click on the No button to continue.Figure 3-128.

NOTE: See “Chapter 5, “Backing up yourdata” for a full explanation of the Restoreprocedure.

You must close the DigiGate-700 for Windows program before you make any attempt torestore your data.

The DigiGate-700 for Windows program opens certain files while it is operating. These files cannot beproperly restored to the systems hard disk until they are closed. If you receive any error messages during arestore process, close the restore operation, make certain the DigiGate-700 for Windows program is closed,reboot the computer if necessary and then restart the restore procedure.If you back up your files using another software package supplied with your backup device or a third partysoftware package, use that same software to restore the data to your system.The following procedure applies to data that used Microsoft Backup and the procedures outlined inChapter 5 as the means of backup.

Page 142: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 62 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-129

1. From the Utility Menu with the Data Utilitiestab active, Click on the Remove button.Figure 3-129.

2. This will open the Delete Data window.Figure 3-130.

3. You can Select (Check) or Deselect (Uncheck)either of the databases, Activity Log orTransaction Log.

4. To change the date, select the month, day, oryear and type your choice or Click on the downarrow to the right of the Date field.Figure 3-130.

5. This will open the calendar. Figure 3-131. Thecurrent date is shown at the bottom of thewindow.

6. At the top of the window are left and rightarrow buttons. Click on these to change themonth, backward and forward, respectively.

7. Click on the correct day.8. All records, up to and including the date chosen,

will be deleted.

Remove

Figure 3-130

Figure 3-131

Page 143: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 63DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-132

9. When all selections have been made, Click onthe OK button to delete the records or on theCancel button to abandon the operation andreturn to the Utility Menu. Figure 3-132.

10. This will open the Confirm window with aprompt of “Prune Data.” Figure 3-133

11. Click on the Yes button to delete the records oron the No button to abandon the operation andreturn to the Utility Menu.

WARNING: This operation is removing datafrom your computer permanently!

Figure 3-133

Page 144: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 64 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-135

1. From the DigiGate Word Processor menu,Click on the DigiEdit button. Figure 3-134.

Note: See your Windows manual or that ofmost Word Processors for a description of themenu items, buttons, and other control fields.

2. This will open the DigiEdit Word Processorwindow. Figure 3-135.

3. The editor follows Windows’ word processorstandards. The controls and layout will befamiliar to windows word processor users.

4. Below the title bar and the bar menu are tworows of icon buttons that provide the standardword processor features.

5. The first row contains buttons for document(file) handling. These are: Create a NewDocument, Open File, Save file, PrintDocument, Cut, Copy, Paste, and UndoLast Action.

6. The second row contains controls for textformatting. These are: Font Name, FontSize, Bold Text, Italic Text, Underline, LeftJustified, Centered, Right Justified, andFlush both sides.

7. The last two buttons on the second line willinsert the Date and Time, respectively, at thecursor position in the document.

Figure 3-134

Word Processing - EditorThis section deals with Word Processing, both creating letters or forms and merging data from theDigiGate-700 for Windows system into those letters or forms. For all of the following, we will assume thatyou have Clicked on the Editor button on the Main Menu and that the DigiGate Word Processorwindow is active.

DigiEditScreen Layout

Page 145: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 65DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Figure 3-136 shows the Status Bar at thebottom of the DigiGate Word Processorwindow.

2. The first section of the Status Bar shows thepage number and number of pages in thedocument. Figure 3-136a.

3. The second shows the line and column of thetext cursor in the document. Figure 3-136b.

4. The third shows the state of the toggle keys.<Ins>, <Num Lock>, <Caps Lock>, and<Scroll Lock>. Figure 3-136c.

5. The last shows the current time. Figure 3-136d.

1. Clicking on File on the menu bar opens theFile menu. Figure 3-137.

2. Selecting New opens a new blank document.3. Selecting Open opens an existing document.4. Selecting Save saves the open file using the

existing name, location, and type.5. Selecting Save As also saves the open file, but

allows you to change the name, location, andfile type.

6. Selecting Printer Setup opens the Windows95 Print Setup window to select and configurethe printer you will use.

7. Selecting Page Setup allows you to change orset the documents margins, header and footer,paper size, and orientation.

8. Selecting Print will print the file to the defaultprinter.

9. Selecting Exit quits the editor program.

NOTE: The first 3 options; New, Open, andSave and the Print option duplicate the actionsof the first four Document Control icons.

Figure 3-137

Figure 3-136

Figure 3-136dFigure 3-136c

Figure 3-136bFigure 3-136a

Status Bar File Menu

Page 146: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 66 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Edit Menu Insert Menu1. Clicking on Edit on the menu bar opens the

Edit menu. Figure 3-138.2. Selecting Cut removes any selected text from

the document and places it on the Windows 95clipboard.

3. Selecting Copy copies any selected text fromthe document and places it on the Windows 95clipboard. This DOES NOT remove text fromthe document.

4. Selecting Paste replaces any selected text withthat held on the clipboard. If NO text isselected, the clipboard contents are inserted intothe document at the cursor location.

5. Selecting Find opens the Find window whereyou can type in text to locate in the document.

6. Selecting Replace opens the Replacewindows where you can type in text to locateand additional text to replace the selectionfound.

NOTE: The first 3 options; Cut, Copy, andPaste duplicate the actions of the fifth, sixth,and seventh Document Control icons.

1. Clicking on Insert on the menu bar opens theInsert menu. Figure 3-139.

2. Selecting Database opens the InsertDatabase Item window. The operation of thiswindow is explained in the next sectionCreating Merge Documents.

3. Selecting Symbol opens the Symbol tablewhere you can select special symbols or marksto place in your document.

4. Selecting Date inserts the current date at thecursor location in the document.

5. Selecting Time inserts the current time at thecursor location in the document.

6. Selecting Date and Time inserts the currentdate and time at the cursor location in thedocument.

NOTE: The Date and Time options duplicatethe actions of the Date and Time icons at theend of the Text Formatting icons.

Figure 3-138 Figure 3-139

Page 147: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 67DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. When you reach a point in your document toinsert a data item, Click on Insert in theWindows Menu Bar to open the Insert menu.Figure 3-140.

2. Select Database from the menu, Figure 3-140,to open the Insert Database Item window.Figure 3-141.

3. Use the scroll bar to find the data field you wantand Select it by Clicking on the data item.Figure 3-141.

4. Click on the OK button to insert the data fieldor on the Cancel button to abandon theoperation and return to the document.Figure 3-141.

5. The data item will be inserted into the documentat the cursor position. Figure 3-142.

6. Data items are enclosed in double brackets.7. Continue typing and inserting data fields as

needed. When the document is complete, saveit to disk by Selecting the Save option on theFile menu.

8. When your document prints, the information inthat field of the tenant record will be printed inplace of the bracketed field name and all textwill be adjusted for the size of the substitution.

9. One document will be printed for each recordselected in the database.

Figure 3-142

Figure 3-140

Figure 3-141

Creating Merge DocumentsIn order to create documents for Mail Merge, you need to know how to create insertion points for databasefields in your document. Each insertion point will hold the contents of one data field, and each documentprinted will hold the information for one record in the database. Therefore, if you wanted to create bills,statements, or notifications for each tenant, or a specific group of tenants, you could layout the format inDigiEdit and place data fields for their name, address, unit number and the monthly rent in the text. Whenthese documents are printed, the information for each tenant you select will be printed on a separate documentor bill.NOTE: See Appendix D for a list of data field names and their descriptions.

Page 148: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 68 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the DigiGate Word Processor menu,Click on the Merge button. Figure 3-143.

2. This will open the Merge window with the Fileto Print tab active. Figure 3-144.

3. Click on the Print Setup button.

Figure 3-144Figure 3-143

Merge

Page 149: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 69DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This opens the Windows Print Setup windowthat allows you to Select the printer you want touse. Figure 3-145.

5. Click on the OK button to Select the printershown or on the Cancel button to abandon theoperation and return to the Merge window.

6. On the Merge window, Figure 3-144, Page 3-68, Click on the button to the right of theSelect File To Print field or type in the nameand path of a text file you want to use. Thiswill open the Open window with a list of thefiles you have produced with the DigiEditWord Processor.Figure 3-146.

7. Click on the file name you want to use andClick on the Open button to select the file oron the Cancel button to abandon the operationand return to the Merge window.

Figure 3-146Figure 3-145

Page 150: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 70 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-148Figure 3-147

8. Figure 3-147 shows an example of a merge filewith the data fields that will be imported intothe document in double brackets.

9. With your document Selected, Click on theUnit Info tab. Figure 3-148.

Page 151: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 71DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-150Figure 3-149

10. This will activate the Unit Info window,Figure 3-149, which allows you to limit yourselection to a specific unit (Unit Numberfield), all units by status (Unit Status field),and other groupings based on size, type, etc.

11. When you have made all necessary selections,Click on the Tenant Info tab.

12. This will activate the Tenant Info window,Figure 3-150, which allows you to further limityour selection to a specific tenant (Last Namefield), and/or by Keypad Zone, Time Zone,Profile, etc.

13. When you have made all necessary selections,Click on the OK button to print the letter(s) oron the Cancel button to abandon the operationand return to the DigiGate Word Processormenu.

Page 152: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 72 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-152

Figure 3-151

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Arm/Disarm button to open the window.Figure 3-151.

2. This will open the Arm/Disarm Alarm Zoneswindow with the Alarm Zones tab active.Figure 3-152.

3. Select the Action you want to perform.

Arm/DisarmThis section deals with sites that have individual Door Alarms and/or security beams protecting their property.Some explanation of terms and concepts is needed here. The following section will describe setting AlarmZones (activating and deactivating). It will also describe activating and deactivating alarms for individualunits or groups of units.An Alarm Zone is similar to a Time Zone or a Keypad Zone, in that it is the defining control for when andhow alarms are generated, what signaling device is used and for how long, and what happens when the alarmis over. In short, it tells the DigiGate-700 for Windows system what to do when an alarm condition exists,for how long to do it, and what to do afterwards.Each individual device, a door alarm, a perimeter beam, etc. must be assigned an Alarm Zone. Before anindividual device can cause an alarm, its Alarm Zone must be activated. Therefore, an individual door orbeam may be activated, but it will not cause an alarm unless its Alarm Zone is activated. Deactivating aZone WILL deactivate all individual units or devices assigned to it, but activating a Zone will NOTnecessarily activate all units or devices assigned to it.

Alarm Zone

Page 153: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 73DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-154Figure 3-153

1. Click on the Arm/Disarm Unit tab to workwith individual or groups of units.Figure 3-154.

2. In the Options area, Select One Unit and typea unit number in the Unit field to arm or disarma single unit.ORSelect the Vacant option under Options tospecify all vacant units or Rented and Vacantto specify ALL units.

3. Select Arm or Disarm from the Alarm Statuslist box.

4. When all selections have been made, Click onthe OK button to perform the action or on theCancel button to abandon the operation andreturn to the Main Menu.

5. The Confirm window will open asking you toverify your decision. The prompt will pertain tothe action you are performing.

6. Click on the OK button to perform the action oron the Cancel button to abandon the operationand return to the Main Menu.

NOTE: If an alarm is sounding, SelectingAcknowledge and Clicking on OK will turnthe siren off and reset the alarm zone. Selectingthe Arm or Disarm selected Alarm Zonewill perform the stated function when OK isClicked.

4. Select (check) or Deselect (uncheck) the AlarmZones check boxes you want.Figure 3-153.

5. The All and None buttons will Select or Clearall the check boxes respectively.

6. When all selections have been made, Click onthe OK button to perform the action or on theCancel button to abandon the operation andreturn to the Main Menu.

The two tabs, Alarm Zones and Arm/DisarmUnit are independent windows. OK must beclicked when the selected windows is active toperform the desired action. Clicking OK on theAlarm Zones windows has NO effect on theArm/Disarm Unit windows and vice versa.

Arm/Disarm Unit

Page 154: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 74 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Sitebutton. Figure 3-155.

Site

2. This will open the Confirm window.Figure 3-156.

3. Click on the Yes button.

Figure 3-156

Figure 3-155

Any action involving the unit or tenant data files or using the System Controller is Site specific. Thismeans that the action will only be performed on the active or currently selected site. This includes all actionsfrom the main menu except the Setup functions or the Help system. It does include the Add, Delete, andModify Units sections of the Setup Menu.

The Site button on the main menu is used to select one specific site or change from one site to another.When any remote site is selected the program calls the number specified in the setup and makes a connectionwith the System Controller at the selected location. This connection is maintained as long as the site remainsthe active site. This provides real time transfer of information between the remote SYSCON and theDigiGate program. The older DOS version of the DigiGate program had to dial and connect for eachtransaction which caused a delay in the action being performed.

Remember to verify that you are logged on to the correct site before performing any tenant or unitaction. The active site name is displayed in the center block at the bottom of the main menu.

Select Site

This section ONLY applies to systems using the Remote version of the software.Systems that use the Standard version software will not have the Site button on their MainMenu, Figure 3-155.

Page 155: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 75DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-158Figure 3-157

4. This will open the Select Site window.Figure 3-157.

5. Select the site you want and click on the OKbutton to make the site active, or on the Cancelbutton to return to the Main Menu.

6. If the Site you selected is a local site, the SelectSite window will close and you will be at theMain Menu with the local site active.

NOTE: The Hang Up button at the bottom ofthe Select Site window allows you to disconnectfrom a remote site and remain logged to thesite’s databases. Clicking this button will breakthe phone connection to the site and return youto the Main Menu still logged to the site.

7. If you selected a remote site, the Call Progresswindow will open giving the status of callingthe remote modem. Figure 3-158.

8. Once connected, the Call Progress window willclose returning you to the Main Menu with thesite active.

Page 156: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 76 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-160Figure 3-159

9. If their is any problem with the call to theremote modem, the Call Progress window willattempt to redial 3 times with approximately 30seconds between each attempt. Figure 3-159.

10. You may click on the Cancel button at any timeto abort the call. This will stop the attempt toconnect with the remote System Controller butwill still log you to the remote site’s database.Any changes made will be saved in thedatabases but the information will have to bedownloaded to the remote System Controller ata later time.

11. After three attempts to connect, The Errorwindow will open with a message thatcommunications could not be established.Figure 3-160.

12. Click on the OK button to return to the MainMenu. Again, you will be logged to the selectedsite’s data bases but will not havecommunications to the System Controller.

Page 157: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 77DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Helpbutton. Figure 3-161.

NOTE: See your Windows manual for adescription of the Help system and its controls.Each screen in the Help system is called a topicand is known by the topic title on the first linein the text area.

2. This opens the Help System window with theDigiGate-700 for Windows Contents”topic. Figure 3-162.

Help

3. Below the standard Title and Menu bars is agroup of Control Buttons. These are theContents, Index, Find, and Back buttons.Figure 3-162.

4. The Contents button will return you to theDigiGate-700 for Windows Contentsscreen from any other topic screen.

5. The Back button will always return to theprevious topic you had active.

Figure 3-162

Figure 3-161

The DigiGate-700 for Windows Help system was developed using the Microsoft Windows Help Compiler.Therefore, it is fully compliant with the Windows Interface Standard.The Help system may be started in two ways:1. The Help button on the DigiGate-700 for Windows Main Menu opens a fully tiered system following

the program structure and the format of this manual in Hypertext.2. From any screen in the program you can press the <F1> key to open the context sensitive help topic

related to the calling screen.

The Help System Window

Page 158: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 78 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-164Figure 3-163

1. The Index tab opens the Help Topics: ...window with an alphabetical list of topics.Figure 3-163.

2. Use the scroll bar or type a word in the dataarea above the list to locate a topic.

3. Double Click on the topic, or Click on a topicand then Click on the Display button, to bringup a topic.

1. The Find tab opens the Help Topics: ...window with a search by typed words orphrases. Figure 3-164.

NOTE: The first time you use this option, youwill be prompted to “Build a Database” forsearch options. Let Windows do this!

2. Here you are given categories based on yourtyped word or phrase. Each category will listthe associated topics.

3. After typing, use the scroll bars to find andSelect the topic you want.

4. Double Click on the topic, or Click on a topicand then Click on the Display button, to bringup a topic.

Index Find

Page 159: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 79DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-166Figure 3-165

1. Below the topic title is the text area. In this textarea is a list of other topics that are underlinedgreen text. This denotes Topic or JumpHotspots. Figure 3-165.

2. Click on one of these Hotspots, Figure 3-165,to jump to the topic title. Figure 3-166.

1. On some topics you will see a Show Mebutton. Figure 3-166.

2. Click on this button to start a video clipshowing the exact procedure to accomplish thistask.

Hypertext Jumps Show Me - Videos

Page 160: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 80 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-168

Figure 3-167

2. The Confirm window will open asking you toverify your decision. Figure 3-168.

3. Click on the Yes button to quit the program oron the No button to abandon the operation andreturn to the Main Menu.

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Exit buttonto quit the program. Figure 3-167.

Exit (Quitting the Program)

Page 161: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 81DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-171

2. Right click on the DigiGate icon to open amenu of the most frequently used functions.Figure 3-171.

3. Selecting any of the options will open theoperational screen for the task selected.

1. When the DigiGate-700 for Windows programhas been minimized to the Task Bar, Clickingon the DigiGate icon in the Tray, Figure 3-171,will open the main menu.

DigiGate on the Taskbar Notification Area

Figure 3-169

Figure 3-170

On the right side of the Windows 95 Taskbar is an area called the Notification Area or “Tray.” This area isused to display the clock and is available to programs for their own icon. When a program is started it canplace an icon in the notification area. When this icon is Clicked, it will perform a task or open a menu.The DigiGate-700 for Windows program uses an animated icon showing a gate opening with a car passingthrough the gate. Figure 3-169. Figure 3-170 shows the DigiGate icon with its bubble help.

Page 162: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 82 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click the Move In button on the Main Menuscreen.

2. Select a unit and Click on the OK button.3. This will open the Move In Tenant window.

Figure 3-172.4. Click on the Access tab.5. Open the LCD Message list box to the right of

the Access Number list box.6. Select one of the messages.7. When you have completed the move in, Click

on the OK button. The message will displaywhen the tenant uses the selected keypads forthe number of times set in Count in the Createnew message window, Figure 2-99, Page 2-50.

1. Click the Find button on the Main Menuscreen.

2. Select a unit and Click on the OK button.3. This will open the Find/Edit Unit

Information window. Figure 3-173.4. Click on the Access tab.5. Open the LCD Message list box to the right of

the Access Number list box.6. Select one of the messages.7. When you have completed your changes, Click

on the OK button. The message will displaywhen the tenant uses the selected keypads forthe number of times set in Count in the Createnew message window, Figure 2-99, Page 2-50.

Figure 3-172 Figure 3-173

The LCD Option setup (amount of time each message is displayed, the number of times a message willdisplay for a tenant, and at what keypads the message will display), and the creation of custom messages wasdescribed in the “Options” section of Chapter 2.This section only deals with assigning messages to specific tenants.The setups for any message may be modified each time the message is assigned to a tenant, changing thesetup must be done in the setup menu, not here.

LCD Keypad OptionDigiGate System Options

Assigning Messages at Move In Assigning Messages in Find/Edit

Page 163: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 83DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-174

Figure 3-177

Picture OptionThe Picture Option allows you to place a captured or scanned image of a person into the tenant databaseand have it available to view in the tenant record. This picture will also be displayed in a popup windowwhen the tenant’s access code is entered at the keypad.The pictures must be obtained independently of the DigiGate-700 for Windows program and saved in“.bmp” or “.jpg” format. You may save one picture per tenant and one picture each, for any OtherAuthorized tenants. It is strongly suggested that all image files be stored in one directory, ideally a directoryunder the DigiGate directory.The four Figures above show the screens where you can assign a picture to a tenant or Other Authorizedtenant in the Move In window or in the Find/Edit Unit Information window.

1. Click the Move In button on the Main Menuscreen.

2. Select a unit and Click on the OK button.3. This will open the Move In Tenant window.

Figure 3-174.4. Select either the Tenant tab, Figure 3-174, or

the Authorized tab, Figure 3-175.5. Click on the Picture button on the right side of

the screen.

1. Click the Find button on the Main Menu.2. Select a unit and Click on the OK button.3. This will open the Find/Edit Unit

Information window. Figure 3-172,Page 3-82.

4. Select either the Tenant tab, Figure 3-176, orthe Authorized tab, Figure 3-177.

5. Click on the Picture button on the right side ofthe screen.

Figure 3-175

Figure 3-176

Assigning Pictures at Move In Assigning Pictures in Find/Edit

Page 164: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 84 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-178

Figure 3-179

1. From any of the Picture buttons, the Picturewindow will open. Figure 3-178.

2. Add a new picture or change an existing one byclicking on the folder at the right side of the textbox. Figure 3-178.

3. This will open the Browse window.Figure 3-179.

4. Use the window controls at the top of thewindow to find the directory where you storedyour images. The actual files will be displayedin the window below the controls.

5. Select the desired image and Click on theOpen button.

NOTE: The image will be displayed to theright when it is selected in the list box, so youcan scan through the images.

The Assignment Process

Page 165: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

3 - 85DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 3-180 Figure 3-181

6. The Picture window will open with the imagein place. Figure 3-180.

7. Click on the OK button to accept the thepicture.

8. The Move In or Other Authorized windowwill open.

9. Figure 3-181 shows the same window asFigure 3-180, but accessed from the OtherAuthorized window.

Page 166: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

3 - 86 Operating Instructions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Page 167: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Install the DigiGate-700 for Windows program .........................2. Start the DigiGate-700 for Windows program ............................3. Quit the DigiGate-700 for Windows program .............................4. Backup my data .............................................................................

5. Add Units .......................................................................................6. Delete Units ....................................................................................7. Modify Units ..................................................................................8. Move a Tenant In ...........................................................................9. Move a Tenant Out ........................................................................10. Make a Tenant Delinquent ...........................................................11. Make a Tenant Paid Up ................................................................12. Transfer Tenants ...........................................................................13. Link Tenant Units .........................................................................14. Find a Unit/Tenant .......................................................................15. Change Tenant Information ........................................................16. Find the System Controller Version ............................................17. Find the Software Version and Serial Number ..........................18. Open and Close the Gate or Hold it Open ..................................19. Set the System Time and Date .....................................................20. Define Security Levels ..................................................................21. Define User IDs .............................................................................22. Acknowledge/Arm/Disarm Selected Alarm Zones .....................23. Arm/Disarm Unit ..........................................................................24. Reset the System Controller ........................................................25. Display the Activity Log ...............................................................26. Configure the Activity Log ..........................................................27. Create a Custom Document .........................................................28. Print Mail Merge Letters and Notifications ...............................29. Display Tenants on Site ................................................................30. Print the Gate Activity .................................................................31. Display/Print a Mux/Slot Report ................................................32. Print the System Setup Information ...........................................33. Print a Tenant List .......................................................................

Reference page 1-8 in Chapter 1Reference page 2-2 in Chapter 2Reference page 3-77 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-60 in Chapter 3 and page 5-2 in Chapter 5Reference page 2-37 in Chapter 2Reference page 2-40 in Chapter 2Reference page 2-41 in Chapter 2Reference page 3-2 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-8 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-12 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-13 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-14 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-15 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-18 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-19 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-55 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-55 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-24 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-56 in Chapter 3Reference page 2-6 in Chapter 2Reference page 2-8 in Chapter 2Reference page 3-72 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-73 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-51 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-57 in Chapter 3Reference page 2-9 in Chapter 2Reference page 3-64 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-68 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-46 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-47 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-44 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-45 in Chapter 3Reference page 3-32 in Chapter 3

Chapter 4

How Do I ...?

Page 168: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 2 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

How Do I ...?This section is a condensed version of the first three chapters. It is a quick guide for those who are familiarwith the program, yet occasionally need a refresher in one area or another. Once you have become familiarwith the DigiGate-700 for Windows program, you can find a quick reference in this chapter to the differentoperations. The graphics have been omitted here, but reference to the pages in the manual are given at the endof each topic.

1. Before starting the installation process, close all applications running on your computer.2. On the Windows 95 Task Bar Click on the Start button.3. Select Settings then Control Panel.4. Double Click on Add/Remove Programs.5. Select the Install/Uninstall tab.6. Click the Install button.7. Insert the Disk labeled “DigiGate-700 for Windows 95 Installation Disk #1” into the floppy disk drive

“A” or insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive.8. Type “A:\SETUP.EXE,” if not there. If you are installing from a CD ROM use the letter of the CD

ROM drive in place of the “A.” Do NOT type the quotation marks.9. Click on the Finish button.10. On the Welcome window, Click on the Next button.11. Enter your Name and your Company’s name on the User Information screen.12. Click on the Next button.13. Accept the default “DigiGate for Windows” or type in your choice, or select from the list of

existing groups your PC shows in the Select Program Folder window.14. When all is correct, Click on the Next button.15. Click on the Next button in the Start Copying Files window.16. Change disks as requested.17. When the installation finishes loading all files, you will be asked to restart your PC. Use the normal

Restart procedure for Windows 95.

NOTE: See Page 1-8 in Chapter 1.

Install the DigiGate-700 for Windows program

Page 169: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the DigiWin icon on the desktop or on the Windows 95 Task Bar Click on the Start button.2. Select Programs then DigiGate for Windows, or the Program Group you selected during the

installation procedure.3. Click on DigiWin which will start the program.4. Enter your User ID and Password in the DigiGate Log On window.5. Click on the OK button.

NOTE: See Page 2-2 in Chapter 2.

Start the DigiGate-700 for Windows program

1. Click on the Close button for any open windows and return to the Main Menu.2. At the Main Menu, click on the Exit button to quit the program.3. The Confirm window will open asking you to verify your decision.4. Click on the Yes button to quit the program or on the No button to abandon the operation and return to

the Main Menu.

NOTE: See Page 3-77 in Chapter 3.

Quit the DigiGate-700 for Windows program

Backup my data1. From the Utility Menu with the Data Utilities tab active, Click on the Backup button.2. This will open the Microsoft Backup window with a prompt of “Back up: SiteOne,” “SiteOne”

being the backup set shipped with the DigiGate-700 for Windows program, and a second line prompt of“A backup is about to begin, would you like to continue?”

3. Click on the Yes button in the Microsoft Backup window.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windows default profile for backup is “SiteOne.SET.” The defaultbackup drive for this profile is the A: floppy drive. The backup file created on the floppy drive is“SiteOne_xx.Qic,” where “xx” is a numeric value denoting the number of the backup file created,“SiteOne_00.Qic,” “SiteOne_01.Qic,” etc.

If SiteOne.SET is not present, go to “Chapter 5” and follow the instructions to create a backup set.

NOTE: See Page 3-60 in Chapter 3 and Page 5-2 in Chapter 5 for Windows 95. See Page 3-60 in Chapter 3 and Page 5-22 in Chapter 5 for Windows 98.

Page 170: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 4 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the Setup Menu, then Click on the Add Units button.2. To add a consecutively numbered group of units, Select the Starting Unit Number field and

type in the first unit number in the group.3. Select the Ending Unit Number field and type in the last unit number in the group.4. If you do not have Required Fields for this group, Click on the OK button. The Add Unit

Progress bar will reflect the units being added. Otherwise continue with the following steps.

Add Units

Unit Numbers

Unit Size Information

Misc Unit Information

1. If you selected Unit Size as a required field, Click on the Size tab and Select the proper sizedescription from the Size list box. The Square Feet, Height, and Price fields will displaythe information you entered earlier in the set up procedure.

1. If you selected Unit Type, Door Type, Floors, or Inside/Outside as required fields,Click on the Misc tab and Select the proper descriptions from the appropriate list boxes. Ifnecessary, Click on the proper Inside or Outside selection.

Unit Features

Door Alarm Options

1. If you selected Feature 1, Feature 2, or Feature 3 as Required Fields, Click on theFeatures tab and Select the proper features from the appropriate list boxes.

1. If all of the units in the group you are adding have individual Door Alarms, Click on the DoorAlarm tab.

2. Select the Mux list box and from the list of boards, Select the correct board.3. After a Mux board has been selected, the Slot field will be activated. Until the board

selection, this field is deactivated and cannot be selected. Use the Up or Down arrows at theright side of the box to increase or decrease the number in the Slot field. This number is thestarting number for the group of units you are adding.

4. Select the Alarm Zone list box and from the list of boards, Select the correct zone for thisunit. Normally there is only one Zone “Door Alarms.”

5. If you are loading multiple units that have slot numbers in some sequence respective to theunit numbers, select one of the choices { Increase | Decrease } and the value to incrementBY in the Auto Slot Loading Options area.

6. Click OK to add the units or Cancel to abandon the operation.

NOTE: See Page 2-37 in Chapter 2.

Page 171: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the Setup Menu, then Click on the Delete Units button.2. To delete a consecutively numbered group of units, Select the Starting Unit Number field and type in

the first unit number in the group.3. Select the Ending Unit Number field and type in the last unit number in the group.

NOTE: To delete one unit, enter the same number in the Starting Unit Number and the Ending UnitNumber fields.

4. Click on the Delete button to remove the unit(s) from the database or on the Cancel button to abandonthis operation and return to the Setup Menu.

5. Clicking on the Delete button, opens the Confirm window with the prompt of “Delete Units?”6. Click on the Yes button to delete these units.

NOTE: See Page 2-40 in Chapter 2.

Delete Units

Modify Units1. Click on the Unit Setup tab of the Setup Menu, then Click on the Modify Units button.2. This will open the Modify Unit Information window.

NOTE: The Modify Unit Information window is a grid. Each row in the grid is a unit.

3. Select a unit, (row in the grid) and Click the Edit button to modify unit information.

Size

Misc

1. From the Modify Unit (number) window with the Size tab active Select the proper size descriptionfrom the list box.

1. For Unit Type, Door Type, Floors, or Inside/Outside, Click on the Misc tab and Select the properdescriptions from the list boxes. Click on the proper Inside or Outside selection.

1. For Feature 1, Feature 2, or Feature 3, Click on the Features tab and Select the proper feature(s)from the appropriate list box(es).

1. Click on the Door Alarm tab.2. Open the Mux list box and Select the correct board.3. Increase or decrease the number in the Slot field with the Up or Down arrows on the right.4. Select the Alarm Zone list box and Select the correct zone for this unit.5. Open the Unit Alarm Status list box and Select the correct status for this unit.

Features

Door Alarms

NOTE: See Page 2-41 in Chapter 2.

Page 172: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 6 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Move In button.2. From the Select Unit to Move In window enter a valid unit number in the Unit Number field and

click on the OK button to open the Move In Tenant window.ORClick on the Size field to find a vacant unit of the right size.

3. Select one of the choices to open a list box of all vacant units for that size code.4. Select a unit from the list and Click on the OK button.

Move a Tenant In

Tenant Information1. In the Move In Tenant window with the Tenant tab active enter the needed information.2. Click on the Misc tab.

Misc Information1. Enter the necessary Tenant Information, Credit Card Information, and Marketing Information.

Access Information1. Click on the Access tab, and enter a unique Access Number and select a Keypad Zone and a Time

Zone from the list boxes.2. Make your selections in the two Misc Options check boxes.

Authorized Information1. Click on the Authorized tab. This activates a window where you can add other users of the unit who

will have different Access Codes.2. Enter the First Name and Last Name in the appropriate fields.3. Select a Keypad Zone and a Time Zone from the list boxes.4. Click the Add button to add the new tenant to the list at the bottom of the screen. You can add as many

tenants as you choose to the unit.

Notes1. To add any Notes in the text area, Click on the Notes tab, then Click in the text area, and type freely.

NOTE: There are two buttons just above the text area. One appears as a calendar and will insert thedate at the cursor when Clicked. The second is a clock and will insert the current time at the cursorwhen Clicked.

Linking Units1. When you Click on the OK button, the program gives you the opportunity to link additional units to the

tenant by opening the Confirm window.2. Click on the Yes button in the Confirm window to link additional units to this tenant.3. In the Select units to link window, Select a unit from the list.4. Link the unit by Clicking on the Add button. Continue to link as many units as needed.5. Click on the Exit button when you have completed this operation.

NOTE: See Page 3-2 in Chapter 3.

Page 173: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Move Out button.2. In the Select Unit to Move Out screen, enter a valid unit number in the Unit Number field and Click

on the OK button to open the Move Out Tenant window.ORTo find a tenant by last name, Click on the Last Name field, enter the tenant’s last name, Click on theOK button.

3. Select from the list of tenants, Click on the OK button to open the Move Out Tenant window.4. Click on OK if this is the correct tenant, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu.5. Clicking on OK will open the Confirm window if Verify Prompts is set to Yes.6. Click Yes to vacate the selected unit or No to return to the Main Menu.7. If this unit is Linked with any other unit(s), the Confirm window will appear asking if you want to

“Move out linked units?”8. Click Yes to vacate all linked units for this tenant, or No to vacate just the selected unit.

NOTE: See Page 3-8 in Chapter 3.

Move a Tenant Out

Make a Tenant Delinquent1. From the Main Menu , Click on the Delinquent button.2. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Number field in the Select unit to make delinquent or paid

up screen and Click on OK to open the Make Tenant Delinquent windowOR

3. Click on the Last Name field and enter the tenant’s last name and Click on the OK button.4. Select one of the choices and Click on the OK button.5. Click on the OK button if this is the tenant you want to make delinquent.6. The Confirm window will open if Verify Prompts is set to Yes.7. Click Yes to make the selected unit delinquent.

NOTE: See Page 3-12 in Chapter 3.

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Delinquent button.2. Enter a valid unit number in the Unit Number field in the Select unit to make delinquent or paid

up screen and Click on OK to open the Make Tenant Delinquent windowOR

3. Click on the Last Name field and enter the tenant’s last name and Click on the OK button.4. Select one of the choices and Click on the OK button.5. Click on the OK button if this is the tenant you want to pay up.6. The Confirm window will open if Verify Prompts is set to Yes.7. Click Yes to make the selected unit paid up.

NOTE: See Page 3-13 in Chapter 3.

Make a Tenant Paid Up

Page 174: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 8 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Transfer button.2. This will open the Transfer Unit window.3. Enter a valid unit number in the Transfer Unit window and Click on the OK button to open the Select

units to transfer/copy to windowOR

4. Click on the Last Name field and enter the tenant’s last name and Click on the OK button.5. Select one of the choices and again, Click on the OK button.6. Select a unit from the Select units to transfer/copy to window.7. Click on the Transfer button to move the tenant from one unit to another.8. The Confirm window will open if Verify Prompts is set to Yes.9. Click Yes to transfer the tenant and return to the Main Menu.

NOTE: See Page 3-14 in Chapter 3.

Transfer Tenants

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Transfer button.2. This will open the Transfer Unit window.3. Enter a valid unit number in the Transfer Unit screen and Click on the OK button to open the Select

units to transfer/copy to windowOR

4. Click on the Last Name field and enter the tenant’s last name and Click on the OK button.5. Select one of the choices and Click on the OK button.6. Select a unit from the Select units to transfer/copy to window.7. Click on the Link button to copy the information to the selected unit.8. The Confirm window will open if Verify Prompts is set to Yes.9. Click Yes to link the units and return to the Main Menu.

NOTE: See Page 3-15 in Chapter 3.

Link Tenant Units

Page 175: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 9DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. To find a Tenant or a Unit, Click on the Find button on the Main Menu.2. On the Find Unit screen, enter a valid unit number in the Unit Number field and Click on the OK

button to open the Find/Edit Unit Information window with the Tenant tab active.ORClick on the Last Name field and enter all or part of the tenant’s last name or type a space in the LastName field, which will open a list of all tenants and their unit numbers. Select one.

3. Click on the OK button to open the Find/Edit Unit Information window with the Tenant tab active.

NOTE: See Page 3-18 in Chapter 3.

Find a Unit/Tenant

1. Find the Tenant or Unit as stated above.2. Change the information desired on the Tenant tab and Click on the Misc tab.3. Change any information desired for Tenant Information, Credit Card Information, and Marketing

Information and Click on the Access tab.4. Change the Access Information if needed and Click on the Unit tab.5. This will activate a screen for reviewing the unit information for the tenant. Click on the Authorized

tab when finished.6. You can {Add | Edit | Delete} other users of the unit who will have different Access Codes.7. When you are done, Click on the Notes tab.8. To edit the Notes in the text area, Click in the text area and type freely.9. When all the information has been entered, Click on the OK button.10. The Confirm window will open with a “Change tenant information” prompt.11. Click on the Yes button to change the data or the No button to cancel the update.

NOTE: See Page 3-19 in Chapter 3.

Change Tenant Information

Page 176: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 10 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Click on the Utility button on the Main Menu.2. Click on the Version button on the System Controller tab.3. The Version Information window shows the System Controller version, the Software version and

serial number, and the location of the data directory.

NOTE: See Page 3-55 in Chapter 3.

Find System Controller Version

1. The first location of the software serial number and version is on the bottom line of the Main Menu. Inthe five data areas on this line are: a) User ID and Security Level, b) Software Serial Number, c) SiteName, and d) Software Version.

2. The second location is on the Version Information window shown above in Find System ControllerVersion.

NOTE: See Page 3-55 in Chapter 3.

Find Software Version and Serial Number

1. From the Utility Menu with the System Controller tab active, Click on the Date/Time button.2. This will open the Set System Controller Time window.3. To change the time, Select the hours, minutes, seconds, or AM/PM and use the spinner arrows at the

right of the field to increase or decrease the numbers.4. To change the date, Select the month, day, or year and type your choice or Click on the down arrow to

the right of the Date field.5. This will open the calendar. The current date is shown at the bottom of the calendar window.6. At the top of the window are left and right arrow buttons. Click on these to change the month, backward

and forward, respectively.7. Click on the correct day.8. When all selections have been made, Click on the OK button to update the date/time.

NOTE: See Page 3-56 in Chapter 3.

Set the System Time and Date

Open and Close the Gate or Hold it Open1. Click on the Gate button on theMain Menu.2. Select the Control Point and Action to perform.3. Click on the OK button.

NOTE: See Page 3-24 in Chapter 3.

Page 177: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 11DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Setup button.2. This will open the Setup Menu. Click on the System Setup tab then Click on the Security button.3. Click on the Add button in the Define Security Levels window.4. In the Add Security Level window, Select the Security Level field and type the two character code

you choose.5. Next, Click on the Options tab.6. Click on the check boxes to Select or Deselect each option as preferred.7. Click on the OK button when all selections are as you want them.

NOTE: See Page 2-6 in Chapter 2.

Define Security Levels

1. From the System Setup tab of the Setup Menu, Click on the User Ids button to open the User IDswindow.

2. Click on the Add Button.3. From the Add a new User ID window, Select the User ID field and type in a new 4 character user

name.4. Select the Password field and type in a 4 character password.5. Click on one of the selections { Yes | No } in the Verify Prompts radio button set.6. Select the Security Level list box, then Select the proper security level.7. Click on the Activity Log tab to display the setup window.8. In the Display Activity Log radio button set, Click on one of the selections { Yes | No }.9. If you selected Yes in the Display set, enter the Number of Activities to Display.10. Enter Number of Seconds to Display. Entering a zero (“0”) in this selection will keep the Activity

Log open continuously.11. Click on OK.

NOTE: See Page 2-8 in Chapter 2.

Define User IDs

Page 178: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 12 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Arm/Disarm button to open the Arm/Disarm Alarm Zoneswindow with the Alarm Zones tab active.

2. Select the Action you want to perform.3. Select (checked) or deselect (unchecked) the Alarm Zones check boxes you want.4. The All and None buttons will Select or Clear all the check boxes respectively.

NOTE: If an alarm is sounding, Selecting Acknowledge and Clicking on OK will turn the siren offand reset the alarm zone. Selecting the Arm or Disarm selected Alarm Zone will perform the statedfunction when OK is Clicked on this screen.

The two tabs, Alarm Zones and Arm/Disarm Unit are independent screens. OK must be Clicked onthe active screen to perform the desired action. Clicking OK on the Alarm Zones screen has NO effecton the Arm/Disarm Unit screen and vice versa.

5. When all selections have been made, Click on the OK.

NOTE: See Page 3-72 in Chapter 3.

Acknowledge or Arm/Disarm Selected Alarm Zones

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Arm/Disarm button to open the Arm/Disarm Alarm Zoneswindow with the Alarm Zones tab active.

2. Click on the Arm/Disarm Unit tab to work with individual or groups of units.3. In the Options area, Select One Unit and type a unit number in the Unit field to arm or disarm a single

unit.ORSelect the Vacant option under Options to specify all vacant units or Rented and Vacant to specifyALL units.

4. Select Arm or Disarm from the Alarm Status list box.5. When all selections have been made, Click on the OK button to perform the action.6. Click on the Yes button in the Confirm window to perform the action.

NOTE: See Page 3-73 in Chapter 3.

Arm/Disarm Unit

Page 179: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 13DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Utility button to open the Utility menu with the SystemController tab active.

2. Click on the Clear SysCon button.3. This will open the Confirm window with a prompt of “Clear System Controller?”.4. Click on the Yes button to clear the System Controller.5. From the Utility Menu with the System Controller tab active, Click on the Set Controller button.6. This will open the Set System Controller window.7. Click on the OK button to set the System Controller.8. From the Utility Menu with the System Controller tab active, Click on the Download All button.9. From the Download All Units window, Click on the OK button to download the units.

NOTE: See Page 3-51 in Chapter 3.

Reset the System Controller

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Utility button to open the Utility menu with the SystemController tab active.

2. Click on the Activity Log button.3. This will open the Activity Log window with the number of activities and for the amount of time you

specified in the User ID setup.

NOTE: See Page 3-57 in Chapter 3.

Display the Activity Log

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Setup button to open the Setup menu.2. Click on the System Setup tab.3. Click on the User IDs button.4. Select the User ID you want and Click on the Edit button.5. Click on the Activity Log tab and make the selections you want.6. Click on the OK button.

NOTE: See Page 2-9 in Chapter 2.

Configure the Activity Log

Page 180: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 14 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Editor button.2. From the DigiGate Word Processor menu, Click on the DigiEdit button.3. This will open the DigiEdit Word Processor window.4. Click inside the text area and type your letter.5. When you reach a point in your document to insert a data item, Click on Insert in the windows Menu

Bar to open the Insert menu.6. Select Database from the menu to open the Insert Database Item window.7. Use the scroll bar to find the data field you want and Click on the data item.8. Click on the OK button to insert the data field.9. The data item will be inserted into the document at the cursor position.10. Data items are enclosed in double brackets.11. When your document prints, the information in that field of the tenant record will be printed in place of

the bracketed field name and all text will be adjusted for the size of the substitution.12. One document will be printed for each record selected in the database.

NOTE: See Page 3-64 and 3-67 in Chapter 3.

Create a Custom Document

Print Mail Merge Letters and Notifications1. From the DigiGate Word Processor menu, Click on the Merge button.2. This will open the Merge window with the File to Print tab active.3. Click on the Print Setup button.4. This opens the Print Setup window. Select the printer you want to use.5. Click on the OK button.6. On the Merge window, Click on the button to the right of the Select File To Print field or type in the

name of a text file you want to use.7. From the Open window, Click on the file name you want to use and Click on the Open button to select

the file.8. With your document Selected, Click on the Unit Info tab.9. This will activate the Unit Info window, which allows you to limit your selection to a specific unit (Unit

Number field), all units by status (Unit Status field), and other groupings.10. When you have made all necessary selections, Click on the Tenant Info tab.11. This will activate the Tenant Info screen, which allows you to further limit your selection to a specific

tenant (Last Name field), and/or by Keypad Zone, Time Zone, Profile.12. When you have made all necessary selections, Click on the OK button to print the letters.

NOTE: See Page 3-68 in Chapter 3.

Page 181: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4- 15DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Display Tenants on Site1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Report button to open the Report Menu window. Click on the

Activity Reports tab.2. Click on the Onsite button.3. This will open the report display window with the title of Tenants Onsite and run the

Tenants Onsite.4. Click on the Close button to return to the Report Menu.

NOTE: See Page 3-46 in Chapter 3.

Print the Gate Activity1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Report button to open the Report Menu window. Click on the

Activity Reports tab.2. Click on the Activity Log button.3. This will open the Select activities to be displayed window with the Activity tab active.4. You can select the types of activity that you want to include in the report by Selecting or Deselecting any

of the check boxes on this screen.5. The All and None buttons will Select or Clear all the check boxes respectively.6. When all selections are made, Click on the Criteria tab.7. From the Criteria window you can select a specific Unit Number or a date range for the activities.8. To limit the report to a specific unit, type a valid unit number into the Unit Number field.9. To enter a date range, Select the month, day, or year and type your choice or Click on the down arrow to

the right of the Starting Date field.10. At the top of the calendar window are left and right arrow buttons. Click on these to change the month,

backward and forward, respectively.11. Click on the correct day.12. Repeat steps 9-12 for the Ending Date field.13. When all selections have been made, Click on the OK button to run the report or on the Cancel button

to abandon the operation.14. Click on the Close button when you want to return to the Report Menu.

NOTE: See Page 3-47 in Chapter 3.

Page 182: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

4 - 16 How Do I ...?

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Display/Print a Mux/Slot Report1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Report button to open the Report Menu window. Click on the

Misc Reports tab.2. Click on the Mux/Slot button.3. This will open the report display window with the title of Mux/Slot Report and run the

Mux/Slot Report.4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number, Mux Number, Slot, and Status (A for Armed or D

for Disarmed)5. There are no totals for this report.6. Click on the Print button to print the report.7. Click on the Close button to return to the Report Menu.

NOTE: See Page 3-44 in Chapter 3.

Print the System Setup Information1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Report button to open the Report Menu window. Click on the

Misc Reports tab.2. Click on the Setup Info button.

NOTE: The Setup Info is a series of reports that show your system configuration and print as a batch.

3. This will open the Confirm window with the prompt “Print setup information.”4. Click on the Yes button to print the reports.

NOTE: See Page 3-45 in Chapter 3.

Print a Tenant List1. From the Main Menu, Click on the Report button to open the Report Menu window. Click on the

Unit Reports tab.2. Click on the Rented Units button.3. This will open the report display window with the title of Rented Units and run the Rented Units

report.4. The columns displayed are: Unit Number, First Name, Last Name, Company and Status.5. The total at the end of the report is: Total Units (listed in the report).6. Click on the Print button to print the report.

NOTE: See Page 3-32 in Chapter 3.

Page 183: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ......................................................................

2. Backup Strategies .............................................................

3. Data Backup .....................................................................

4. Data Restore .....................................................................

Why protect your data

Effective methods for data protection

Instructions

Instructions

Chapter 5

Backing Up Your Data

Page 184: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 2 Backing Up Your Data

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

This section deals with protecting the information in the DigiGate-700™ for Windows database.Having a competent backup procedure can prevent many hours of frustration and down time atyour location.

In the computer world there is a saying: “There are two kinds of users, those that have experienceda major system crash (data loss), and those that are going to!” Anyone that has experienced theloss of their data is now well aware of the value of proper backup procedures and of followingthem closely.

The DigiGate-700™ for Windows® program uses the ZIP format as the means to protect yourdata. This maintains consistency with most existing backup systems and provides for datacompression choice, multiple disk backups, and selection of many different data storage deviceslike tape drives or Zip drives. Microsoft has changed it backup system in recent versions making itdifficult to maintain consistent backup procedures. The backup feature in the software was addedto provide a consistent process for archiving data and program setups.

The following will provide some basic information on the Digitech backup utility. Any otherbackup device’s software may be used in place of or in addition to the DigiGate method providedin this section.

Introduction

A back up strategy is a plan for the regular backup of data, usually at several different levels, andfor a period of time sufficient to minimize the effect of any loss.

There are times when data corruption can remain unnoticed for a period of time. When thishappens you can make corrupted backups that may be used at a later date to restore data that hasbeen lost. To prevent this type of occurrence, backup strategies are planned in a tiered structure.This allows the restoration of data on several different levels, depending on how long it took tobecome aware of the corruption.

The simplest strategy is to do a full backup of your system at regular intervals (daily, weekly, etc.)and to save them for as long as you think it is necessary.

The most complex is a system of master backups done on a monthly basis with sub masters doneweekly and an incremental or differential done on a daily basis using different media for each dayuntil two cycles of the master backup have been completed.

Since the amount of data in the DigiGate-700™ for Windows® system is not that large, thesimple strategy is sufficient and provides the best protection.

We suggest a daily backup on a floppy, keeping at least 3 weeks data before reusing the disk. Youmay also keep a monthly master of the data for several months to insure against a total loss.

If you do a regular Full System backup on tape or some other media, use the following pages toadd the DigiGate data files to your data set.

BETTER SAFE THAN SORRY!!

Backup Strategies

Page 185: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the System Toolbar, click on theUtilities button. Figure 5-1

2. This opens the Utility window. Figure 5-23. Click on the Data Utilities tab.

Figure 5-1

Figure 5-2

Data Backup

Page 186: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 4 Backing Up Your Data

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Utility Menu window.Figure 5-3

5. Click on the Backup button.

6. This will open the Backup window.Figure 5-4

7. Select the data to backup in the Selectionbox.

8. Next, click on the folder icon on the rightside of the Backup to: data field.Figure 5-4

Figure 5-3

Figure 5-4

Page 187: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

9. This opens the Select Directorywindow. Figure 5-5

10. Navigate to the directory the backupshould be saved to.

11. Click on the OK button.

12. This returns to the Backup window.Figure 5-6

13. Click on the Backup button.

NOTE: The program writes the backupZip file to the selected directory with thename Digitech InternationalInc.{yyyymmdd}.zip where{yyyymmdd} is the date the file is saved.

14. When the operation completes, the UtilityMenu window is activated.

15. Click on the Close button to return to theSystem Toolbar.

Figure 5-5

Figure 5-6

Page 188: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 6 Backing Up Your Data

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. From the System Toolbar, click on theUtilities button. Figure 5-7

2. This opens the Utility window. Figure 5-83. Click on the Data Utilities tab.

Figure 5-7

Figure 5-8

Data RestoreYou must close the DigiGate-700™ for Windows® program before you restore your data.

The DigiGate-700™ for Windows® program opens certain files while it is operating. These filescannot be properly restored to the system’s hard disk until they are closed. If you receive any errormessages during a restore process, close the restore operation, make certain the DigiGate-700™for Windows® program is closed, re-boot the computer if necessary and then restart the restoreprocedure.

If you back up your files using another software package supplied with your backup device or athird party software package, use that same software to restore the data to your system.

The following procedure applies to data that used the DigiGate-700™ for Windows® programand the procedures outlined in this Chapter as the means of backup.

Page 189: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

4. This will open the Utility Menu window.Figure 5-9

5. Click on the Restore button.

6. This will open the Restore window.Figure 5-10

7. Select the data to backup in the Selectionbox.

8. Next, click on the folder icon on the rightside of the Restore from: data field.Figure 5-10

Figure 5-9

Figure 5-10

Page 190: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

5 - 8 Backing Up Your Data

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure 5-11

Figure 5-12

9. This opens the Browse window.Figure 5-11

10. Navigate to the directory the data shouldbe restored from.

11. Click on the Open button.

NOTE: You may select any drive ordevice connected to you computer as longas it has been designated as a drive onyour system.

12. This returns to the Restore window.Figure 5-6

13. Click on the Restore button.14. When the operation completes, the Utility

Menu window is activated.15. Click on the Close button to return to the

System Toolbar.

Page 191: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ........................................................................

2. Default Settings ...................................................................

3. Default Values .....................................................................

What to expect after installation

Log OnUser IDPassword

SecurityLevelOptions

Require User IDsVerify PromptsActivity Log

DisplayNumber of ActivitiesNumber of Seconds

Required Fields

Misc. SetupTenant Profile CodesMarketing CodesInsurance CodesCredit Card Codes

System Controller SetupTime ZonesDoor AlarmsHolidaysSerial Ports

Unit SetupUnit TypesUnit FeaturesDoor TypesFloor TypesUnit SizesUnit NumbersDoor Alarm Options

Required FieldsTenant InformationUnit Information

Appendix A

Default Settings & Values

Page 192: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

A - 2 Default Settings & Values

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

The DigiGate-700 for Windows program, when shipped, is configured with certain defaultSettings and Values. All of these may be changed to suit your specific needs.

When we say Settings, we mean the way the program has been set up to work, i.e., are User IDsrequired and if so, what is the ID and Password to access the system; what is the “Security Level”and what “Required Fields” must be entered when adding tenants or new users.

By Values we mean actual information stored in the system’s databases, which can be selected bythe user from the list boxes displayed in the Site Setup. This information is used for required fieldsand both Tenant and Unit information in “Chapter 2, Setting Up a New Site.”

This section will tell you how the DigiGate-700 for Windows system is configured when it isshipped, thereby, allowing you to decide what changes you want to make.

There are other Settings and Values that deal with the operation of the equipment and are specificto your site. These are predefined and configured by your Reseller or Installer or the DigitechInternational, Inc. Project Manager that was involved in designing the system for your location.These settings are not user accessible and are not included in this Guide. Modification of thesevalues could cause your entire system to become inoperable. You should consult with the personor company where you obtained your system or call the Digitech International, Inc. servicedepartment if you plan any major change in the way your system operates.

Introduction

Default SettingsSETTING DEFAULT REQUIRED

Logon - User ID Password

USER1234

Required if "RequireUser IDs" is Yes

Security - Level Options

MG (Management)Full Access (All Rights)

Required if "RequireUser IDs" is Yes

Require User IDs Yes No

Verify Prompts Yes No

Activity Log - Display Number of Activities Number of Seconds

Yes510

NoYes if "Display" is YesYes if "Display" is Yes

Required Fields Tenant Last NameTenant First NameAccess Code on Move In

YesNoYes

Page 193: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

A - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Default ValuesFIELD CODE VALUE REQUIRED

Misc Setup - Tenant Profile BUMOPU

Business UseMovingPersonal Use

No

Misc Setup - Marketing DBPTRFYP

Drive ByPrevious TenantReferralYellow Pages

No

Misc Setup - Insurance DHDI

Deans & HomerDeclined Insurance

No

Misc Setup - Credit Card AXMCVS

American ExpressMaster CardVisa

No

System Controller Setup - Time Zones 01

24 HoursNormal Hours.(6AM-10PM)

YesNo

System Controller Setup - DoorAlarms

Y Disarm when vacatedNo

System Controller Setup - Holidays No Holidays defined No

System Controller Setup - Serial Ports Com1Com2Com3Com4None

Auto detected bysoftware

Yes

Unit Setup - Unit Types RVSS

RV ParkingSelf Storage

No

Unit Setup - Unit Features CCDAIE

Climate ControlledDoor AlarmInterior Electric

No

Unit Setup - Door Types RUSD

Rollup DoorSwing Door

No

Unit Setup - Floor Types GL Ground Level No

Unit Setup - Unit Sizes No Sizes defined No

Unit Setup - Unit Numbers Defined per contractor Yes

Unit Setup - Door Alarm Options MuxSlotZone

Defined per contractorRequired for

Individual alarmedunits ONLY

Page 194: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

A - 4 Default Settings & Values

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2.3

Default ValuesMENU / TAB FIELD ENTRY REQUIRED

Required Fields - Tenant Information Last NameFirst NameCompany NameAddressCityStateZip CodeHome PhoneWork PhoneFax NumberSocial Security NumberCredit Card NumberInsuranceMarketingLicenseProfileMiles From Site

YYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

YesNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNo

Required Fields - Unit Information Unit SizeSquare FeetHeightUnit PriceUnit TypeDoor TypeFloorInside/OutsideFeature OneFeature TwoFeature ThreeMux NumberSlot Number

NNNNNNNNNNNNN

NoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNoNo

Page 195: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Appendix B

Preparation for System Setup

1. Introduction .....................................................................

2. Do I need User ID and Security Levels? .............................

3. What information should I gather about my tenants? .......

4. What information should I gather about my units? ..........

5. What other information should I gather about the site? ........

Defaults & Your Site

User ID

Security Level

Tenant Profile InformationMarketing InformationInsurance InformationCredit Card Information

Unit TypesUnit FeaturesDoor TypesFloor TypesUnit Sizes

Setting up Time ZonesHoliday InformationRequired FieldsDefault ValuesDoor alarm Mux/Slot Information

Page 196: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

B - 2 Appendix Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

This form is designed to aid in the set up of the DigiGate-700 for Windows software to thespecifications required for your location.

The DigiGate-700 for Windows program is designed to be very flexible in order to accommodatesites of all sizes and most situations which require an Owner/Manager to track and analyze tenantprofiles, renter’s preferences, unit turnover, and other marketing information. By using RequiredFields, maintaining this information is very simple and omission by employees is eliminated. Youmay also set default values for much of the information, speeding entry and lowering the amount oftime required to perform an operation.

Do I need User ID and Security Levels?

Introduction

User IDs and Security Levels allow you to define distinct configurations for each user and to set access for the users to different modulesin the DigiGate-700 for Windows system.

You may only have one or two people working at the site and not need any type of security, or you may have relief people who are onlythere for one day a week and need to restrict their access to certain functions in the system.

Also, you may want to customize the way the DigiGate-700 for Windows system responds to user actions or displays certaininformation.

If you do not change any of the default setup for User IDs or Security Levels:

1. All users will use the default Logon and Password. (See “Appendix A, Default Settings & Values”)2. All users will have access to all areas of the program.3. You may still modify the values in the database tables as needed for required fields or default values.

If you turn off “Require User IDs”:

1. No user of your computer will be denied access to the DigiGate-700 for Windows program.2. All users will have access to all areas of the program.3. You may still modify the values in the database tables as needed for required fields or default values.

Do you need to restrict access to any part of the system for any users of the System? ................................................

If you answered Yes, go to Page 2-5 and follow the instructions for Setting up Security Levels.

Do you need to distinguish between Users or their setups? ................................................................................

If you answered No, go to Page 2-12 and 2-13 and follow the instructions to disable User IDs (Item 10).

If you answered Yes, go to Page 2-5 and follow the instructions for setting up Security Levels. Then go to Page 2-8and follow the instructions for adding new users.

Yes No

___ ___

___ ___

Page 197: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

B - 3Publication Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Yes No

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

Do I need to get Tenant Profiles? .................................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-15 and follow the instructions to add or change the Tenant Profile codes.

Do I need to get Marketing information? .......................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-17 and follow the instructions to add or change the Marketing codes.

Do I need to get Insurance information? ........................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-19 and follow the instructions to add or change the Insurance codes.

Do I need to get Credit Card information? .....................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered “NO”, go to page 2-21 and follow the instructions to add or change the Credit Card codes.

This section deals with information that you choose to collect and store on the type of tenants youhave, why they rent from you, how they pay, and how much repeat business you have. Thisiallows you to create custom reports to help analyze the information for marketing efforts.

First look at “Appendix A, Default Settings & Values.” On Page A-3, the “Default Values” chartshows four fields under “Misc Setup.” Examine these and decide if this is information you want togather and store.

What information should I gather about my tenants?

Page 198: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

B - 4 Appendix Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Yes No

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

___ ___

Do I need to get Unit Type? ........................................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-28 and follow the instructions to add or change the Unit Type codes.

Do I need to get Unit Features information? ...................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-30 and follow the instructions to add or change the Unit Features codes.

Do I need to get Door Types information? .....................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-31 and follow the instructions to add or change the Door Type codes.

Do I need to get Floor Types information? .....................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-33 and follow the instructions to add or change the Floor Type codes.

Do I need to get Unit Sizes? .......................................................................................................................

If NO, skip the next question.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-35 and follow the instructions to add or change the Unit Size codes.

This section deals with information that you choose to collect and store on the type of units youhave. Unit size, type, features, floor, and door type can show what units are most popular, etc. Youcan then create custom reports to help analyze the information for marketing efforts.

First look at “Appendix A, Default Settings & Values.” On Page A-3, the “Default Values” chartshows seven fields under “Unit Setup.” Examine the first five and decide if this is information youwant to gather and store. The last two are defined by the contractor.

What information should I gather about my units?

Page 199: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

B - 5Publication Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

What other information should I gather about the site?

This section deals with the actual hours that the gate will operate for tenants. You can enter up to64 different Time Zones for gate operation and assign any of these Time Zones to any tenant.

First look at “Appendix A, Default Settings & Values.” On Page A-3, the “Default Values” chartshows the field Time Zones under “System Controller Setup.” There are two entries for this option:“0” for 24 Hours and “1” for Normal Hours, which is set for 6 a.m. to 10 p.m. The 24 Hour TimeZone is a required system field and cannot be changed. The Normal Hours has been added foryour convenience and may be deleted or modified as necessary.

There is no default entry set in the system, you may set a default or leave it to be decided when atenant is moved in.

Yes No

___ ___

___ ___

Are the times in the Normal Hours Time Zone correct for my location? ................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-24 and follow the instructions to edit the Time Zone hours.

Are the Values listed sufficient? ..................................................................................................................

If you answered NO, go to Page 2-23 and follow the instructions to add new Time Zones.

Holiday Information

This section deals with the actual hours that the gate will operate for tenants during Holidays. Ifyou maintain different times that tenants may enter your location on one or more holidays, you canenter those Holidays in the setup and specify the hours that the gate will operate in the TimeZones.

There are no Holidays defined in the DigiGate-700 for Windows system and therefore no defaultentries set in the system.

Yes No

___ ___Are there different times for gate operation on any holiday in the year? .................................................................

If you answered NO, skip this section and procede to the next section

If you answered YES, go to Page 2-26 and follow the instructions to add the holidays that have different hours.

Then go to Page 2-24 and follow the instructions to edit the Time Zones necessary.

NOTE: Only edit the holiday line on the Time Zone window. This will cause the hours specified to be theoperational hours for any holiday defined.

Setting up time Zones

Page 200: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

B - 6 Appendix Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Yes No

___ ___Do I need to make changes to the values on page A-4? ......................................................................................

If you answered NO, skip this section entirely.

If you answered YES, go to Page 2-11 and follow the instructions for Setting up Required Fields.

Required FieldsThis section deals with the information you feel is necessary and must be entered into each tenantor unit record of the system.

First look at “Appendix A, Default Settings & Values.” On Page A-4, the “Default Values” chartshows two sections under “Required Fields.” Examine these fields and decide if this information isnecessary for each record in the system.

Default Values

Yes No

___ ___Do I want to set default values for tenant or user records? ..................................................................................

If you answered NO, skip this section entirely.

If you answered YES, go to Page 2-12 and follow the instructions for Setting up Default Field Values.

This section deals with the information you feel is reasonably consistent among tenants or users ofthe system. The information selected here will automatically be entered into each NEW recordadded to the tenant database through Move In, or to each NEW user added to the system. Thisinformation may be edited and changed at any time by a user that has access to the respectivesection of the DigiGate-700 system. You can also change the Default Values at any time for futureadditions to the tenant or user databases.

First look at “Appendix A, Default Settings & Values.” The “Default Values” chart on Page A-3 andPages 2-12 and 2-13 show the possibilities of setting default values.

Page 201: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

B - 7Publication Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Door Alarm Mux/slot InformationThis section deals with the coordination of information in the DigiGate-700 for Windows programand the way your location has been wired for individually alarmed units. This information shouldhave been entered and setup by your Reseller, Installer, or the DigiTech International, Inc. ProjectManager who helped design your location layout.

NOTE: Changing any information in this section without specific diagrams and charts of thewiring of your location can render your DigiGate-700 Access System totally inoperable.

We strongly recommend that you call your Dealer, Installer or the DigiTech International, Inc.service department before you change any information regarding Door Alarms!

Yes No

___ ___Are ALL of my units alarmed individually? .................................................................................................

If you answered NO, skip this section completely!

If you answered YES, call your Dealer, Installer or the DigiTech International, Inc. Service department

Page 202: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

B - 8 Appendix Title

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Page 203: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ......................................................................

2. Strategies ...........................................................................

What do I need to do?

Methods based on required Fields andDoor Alarms

Appendix C

Preparation for Adding Units

Page 204: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

C - 2 Preparation for Adding Units

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2.3

This section deals with the initial loading of unit information in the DigiGate-700 for Windowsdatabase. If your site was installed by a Reseller and/or you have individual door alarms, a zonedsite (denying or allowing access to areas for certain tenants), or other specific criteria for allowingaccess to the site, the units have more than likely been added prior to this during the set up andtesting phase of installation.Units may be added to or deleted from the database individually, in blocks or groups, or in onesingle operation. They can only be modified on an individual basis. Below, we are going to showyou several different strategies for building the unit database. The method chosen will be basedon the unit information you decide to require in your unit database, the layout of your units on thesite, and the numbering scheme you have chosen.

The factors that determine how simple or how complicated this operation becomes are:1. How much information you set as required on Page 2-11.2. How your units are numbered in relation to the physical set up of your site.

You should attempt to find the largest consecutively numbered group of units with similarproperties or required fields.

Introduction

1. You have no required fields or door alarms.If your units are all numbered consecutively, enter the first and last unit numbers and add themall as one block. If not, enter each group of consecutively numbered units in one operation.

NOTE: In some cases it may be quicker to add a large block of units and delete the missing numbers.You will have to decide which method is quicker.

2. You have required fields but no door alarms.Try to group as many units as possible containing the same required fields.

3. You have door alarms.You will need a copy of the Mux/Slot worksheets that were used during the installation of thesite wiring. If the Mux and Slots are consecutively numbered and run concurrently in the sameorder as the unit numbers, you can block the unit numbers and use the Auto Slot LoadingOption shown on Page 2-39, Figure 2-77.

NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to add large groups of units one at a time.

Strategies

Page 205: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction .................................................................................

2. Merge Data Fields and Descriptions ..........................................

About Mail Merge

ACCESSNUMBERADDRESSCARDTYPECITYCOMPANYNAMECREDITCARDDOORTYPEFAXPHONEFEATURE1FEATURE2FEATURE3FLOORHEIGHTHOMEPHONEINSIDE/OUTSIDEINSURANCEKEYPADZONELASTNAMELICENSEMARKETINGMEMOMILESFROMSITEMOVEINDATEPRICEPROFILESIZESQUAREFEETSSNSTATEUNITUNITTYPETIMEZONEVALIDDATEWORKPHONEZIP

Appendix D

Merge Data Fields & Descriptions

Page 206: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

D - 2 Merge Data Fields & Descriptions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Introduction

ACCESSNUMBER ............................... Tenant’s access number (password).

ADDRESS ............................................. Tenant’s street address.

CARDTYPE .......................................... Credit Card Type (i.e. Visa, Master Card, etc.…).

CITY ...................................................... Tenant’s city.

COMPANYNAME ................................ Company Name.

CREDITCARD ...................................... Credit Card Number.

DOORTYPE .......................................... Type of door unit has (i.e. Roll up, Swing Door, etc.…).

FAXPHONE .......................................... Tenant’s fax number.

FEATURE1............................................ Unit’s first feature.

FEATURE2............................................ Unit’s second feature.

FEATURE3............................................ Unit’s third feature.

FLOOR .................................................. Floor that the unit is located on.

HEIGHT ................................................ The height of the unit.

HOMEPHONE ...................................... Tenant’s home phone number.

INSIDE/OUTSIDE ................................ Location of the unit.

INSURANCE ........................................ Type of insurance the tenant has.

In order to produce useful documents (letters, notices, bills, etc.) for groups of tenants, the DigiEdit WordProcessor has been given the ability to merge database data fields into these documents. Anyone who hasused Mail Merge features in the past is well aware of the time savings realized.The following list provides the field names you will see in the database menu of DigiEdit and a description ofeach. After reviewing this list, you will be able to see the value and flexibility you have in creating usefultime saving sales, collection and marketing aids.

Database Field Description

Merge Database Fields and Descriptions

Page 207: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

D - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

KEYPADZONE..................................... Keypad zone that is assigned to tenant.

LASTNAME ......................................... The last name of the tenant.

LICENSE ............................................... License number of the tenant.

MARKETING ....................................... Type of marketing that made the tenant choose the site.

MEMO................................................... Notes entered about the tenant.

MILESFROMSITE ............................... Number of miles the tenant is from site.

MOVEINDATE ..................................... The date that the tenant was moved in the DigiGatesystem.

PRICE .................................................... The periodic cost of the unit, usually monthly.

PROFILE ............................................... The reason the tenant rented the unit.

SIZE ....................................................... The size code of the unit.

SQUAREFEET ...................................... The unit’s floor space.

SSN ........................................................ The tenant’s Social Security number.

STATE ................................................... The tenant’s residence state.

UNIT ..................................................... The unit number.

UNITTYPE ........................................... The unit category you have set up

TIMEZONE ........................................... The tenant’s access hours.

VALIDATE ............................................ Credit Card’s expiration date.

WORKPHONE...................................... The tenant’s telephone number at work.

ZIP ........................................................ The tenant’s zip code.

Database Field Description

Page 208: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

D - 4 Merge Data Fields & Descriptions

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

Page 209: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Appendix E

1. Introduction ......................................................................

2. What’s New in the Windows Version ..............................

3. Running DigiConvert .......................................................

4. Completing Your Setup ....................................................

The DigiConvert Program

SecurityUser OperationsAccess ControlData EntryMarketing

Starting the ProgramWhat is Converted

What is needed after the conversion

Upgrading DOS Software to Windows

Page 210: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

E - 2 Upgrading DOS Software to Windows

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Security1. User Security Levels and Logon - Restrict/Allow user’s access to Modules in the system.2. Separate log for Tenant activity and Manager activity.3. More flexible data backup using Microsoft Backup - Backup to any supported device.4. Retrieve Information from the System Controller - Unit Number, Tenant Last Name, Access Code, Time Zone,

Keypad Zone, and Unit Status.

User Operations1. Full feature Word Processor with MailMerge from the DigiGate-700 for Windows database fields.2. Windows Help system - Context sensitive with <F1> key, Indexed or Topic search from the Help button.3. Familiar Windows 95 interface.

Access Control1. Ability to mark tenant as “Never Locked” - Cannot be made delinquent from DigiGate-700 for Windows or from

the accounting program. - For corporate or other accounts where you do not want to restrict access.2. Ability to mark a unit as “Tagged” - Shows “Tagged” on activity log and DigiGraphics to alert the manager.3. Ability to activate some device based on activities at a keypad or other Input point. Activities can be: Bad

password, Bad time zone, Bad keypad zone, Tailgate, Tagged, and Delinquent. For example, a relay could activatewhen a Tenant of a Tagged unit enters the facility, activating an interior buzzer, a video switcher, etc.

4. Mark units as Damaged or Unrentable.

Data Entry1. Ability to set Default values for fields - Speeds entry of unit and tenant information.2. Unit information entry in Tenant entry screens.3. Ability to transfer tenants to other units.4. Ability to Link units using the same tenant information.5. Easier Time Zone entry with the Duplicate button.6. New Auto Slot loading options for Door Alarms.

Marketing1. Expanded Unit Features and information recording.2. Ability to record buying reasons, payment habits, etc for marketing analysis.3. Expanded reporting and custom querys from unit information, tenant information, buying habits, payment methods

and habits, etc.

What’s New in the Windows Version

For those converting to DigiGate-700 for Windows from a prior DOS version of the DigiGate-700 software, the DigiConvert program has been included to make the transition as easy aspossible. DigiConvert is a fully automated procedure that takes the old DigiGate data files andtransfers the information to the proper files for the new Windows program.

NOTE: The DigiGate-700 for Windows upgrade version software is shipped without anysetup information. The DigiConvert converts the setup information and the tenant files fromthe old DOS system to the new DigiGate directory. If you are upgrading to a new computer atthe same time, copy the “C:\DIGI” subdirectory from your old computer to the new com-puter before you run DigiConvert. Make sure that the new computer has the old DigiGatedata in the “C:\DIGI” directory on the new computer. After running DigiConvert you

Introduction

Page 211: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

E - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Running DigiConvert

NOTE: This program cannot be run while theDigiGate-700 for Windows program or any ofits utility programs are running. Close anyDigiGate programs running before startingthis procedure!

1. From the Windows desktop, Click on the Startbutton.

2. Select Programs, then DigiGate forWindows, then DigiConvert. Figure E-1.

3. This will open the DigiConvert window with awarning that all data files in the DigiGate-700for Windows directory will be overwritten.Figure E-2.

4. Click on the Next button.

Figure E-1 Figure E-2

Starting the program

Page 212: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

E - 4 Upgrading DOS Software to Windows

5. This will open the Confirm Data Conversionwindow, which gives a second warning of thedata files being overwritten. Figure E-3.

6. Click on the Next button.

7. This will open the Converting DatabaseFiles window, which shows the progress of theconversion. Figure E-4.

8. When the conversion is completed, theFinished button will appear. Figure E-4.

9. Click on the Finished button to return to yourDesktop.

NOTE: Any errors encountered will open awindow displaying a prompt explaining why theconversion could not be completed.

If you encounter this, record the prompt in theerror window and call Digitech International,Inc. at 1-800-523-9504 before proceeding anyfurther!

Figure E-3 Figure E-4

Page 213: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

E - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Completing Your SetupWhen the conversion completes, refer to “Appendix B, Preparation for System Setup”and “Chapter 2, Setting up a new Site” to add any new features you want to include inyour Windows version. When the setup is completed to your satisfaction, backup yourDigiGate-700 for Windows system. Refer to “Chapter 5, Backing Up Your Data” forinstructions.

What is ConvertedThe DigiConvert program processes the DOS DigiGate site setup information first. Thedatabase information from the DOS version is transferred to the Windows databases inthe order listed below.

Control Points, Control Areas, Input Points, Access Configuration, Keypad Zones,Boards, Time Zones, Alarm Zones, Timer Operations, Size Codes, and Holidays.

Next the tenant information is transferred in the order listed below: Access Code, Unit Number, First Name, Last Name, Company Name, Address, City,State, Zip Code, Home Phone Number, Work Phone Number, SSN, License, TimeZone, Keypad Zone.

Following the tenant information, the unit information is transferred in the order listedbelow:

Unit Number, Price, Size Code, and Unit Status (i.e. Vacant, Rented, Delinquent).

The program scans the database and checks for any size codes that were transferredfrom an accounting program linked to DigiGate and not entered in the DigiGatesystem. These codes are added to the Size Code database.

Following the unit information, the Mux Information is transferred. This is the mux/slotlocation of individual door alarm units.

Following the Mux Information, the Other Authorized Tenant information is transferred.

The last item transferred is the site name.

This information will give you the basic setup for your site to operate in the same mannerit did under the DOS version of the DigiGate-700 software.

YOU MUST BACKUP YOUR SYSTEM AFTER RUNNING DigiConvert !

THIS BACKUP WILL BE YOUR SYSTEM MASTER.

Page 214: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

E - 6 Upgrading DOS Software to Windows

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Page 215: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ....................................................................................

2. Running LinkView .........................................................................

3. Vendor Specific Requirements ......................................................

Integration with Accounting Programs

How LinkView operates

MSTC Unit Numbering for Systems withLinking Units.

Appendix F

Troubleshooting Accounting Link Problems

Page 216: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

F - 2 Troubleshooting Accounting Link Problems

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

The DigiGate-700 for Windows program is designed to work in conjunction with most majormanagement/accounting programs in the industry.

When you move a tenant in or out, transfer them to a new unit, pay up a delinquent, or lock atenant out in your accounting program; the accounting program creates a record for each transac-tion in a Link file. The accounting program then calls a program in the DigiGate-700 for Win-dows system which takes the information in the Link file and uses it to update the databases in theDigiGate-700 for Windows system. The program also sends the information in the Link file tothe DigiGate-700 for Windows System Controller.

When problems occur with the gate system, the first step is to find out where the problem origi-nated.

To do this we have included a program called LinkView in the DigiGate-700 for Windowsesystem. This program allows you to look at the file that holds the information sent from theaccounting program to the DigiGate-700 for Windows program.

LinkView is only for viewing the data file. It does not allow editing of the information. Bychecking the validity of the information in the Link file, it can be determined if the problem isbased in the DigiGate-700 for Windows system (when the data in the Link file is correct) or if theproblem is based in the accounting system (the data in the Link file is NOT correct).

Introduction

Figure F-1

Figure F-2

1. From the Windows desktop, click on the Startbutton. Figure F-1.

2. Select Programs, then DigiGate forWindows, then LinkView. Figure F-1.

3. This will open the DigiGate Link Viewer 1.0window which lists the entries in the Link file.Figure F-2.

Running LinkView

Page 217: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

F - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure F-3

Figure F-4

4. The fields available to the accounting programare: Unit Number, Access Code, LastName, First Name, Company Name,Address, City, State, Zip, Home Phone,Work Phone, Social Security Number,License, Insurance, Marketing Code,Size Code, Time Zone, Lease Number,Price, Status, Keypad Zone, andSquare Feet. Figure F-2, Page F-2 andFigure F-4.

5. The fields that are Required by DigiGate are:Unit Number, Access Code, Last Name,Time Zone, Status, and Keypad Zone.

6. To print a report of these records, click on thePrint button. Figure F-2.

7. The Printing Progress window will openshowing the status of the printout. Figure F-3.

8. Click on the Cancel button to stop the printing.9. The balance of the fields are shown in Figure F-

4.

10. Click on the Exit button when you are finished.This will close the program. Figure F-4.

NOTE: If the data shown in the LinkViewdisplay is NOT correct, call the dealer orsupplier of the accounting program. It is alwayshelpful to have the printout of this file whenyou call the Digitech International, Inc.Service department.

Page 218: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

F - 4 Troubleshooting Accounting Link Problems

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2.3

Vendor Specific Requirements

MSTC Unit Numbering for Systems with Linking Units

In order for the DigiGate-700 for Windows program to work in conjunction with MSTC softwarein Door Alarm and Graphics Display systems, a different setup configuration is designed into theDigiGate-700 for Windows program in DIGI.EXE version 1.9 and greater.

MSTC software does not allow duplicate Access Codes, therefore Linked Units (multiple unitsrented by one customer using one access code) present a problem when the site has Door Alarms ora Graphics Display. Door alarm systems must arm and disarm all units for a tenant to be able toenter without causing an alarm condition. Graphics display systems must be able to display the onsite condition of the units when a tenant has entered the facility.

The DigiGate-700 for Windows program corrects this situation by stripping the last digit off theaccess code transmitted from the MSTC software. This allows MSTC to have unique accesscodes and DigiGate-700 for Windows to process alarm and Graphics situations.

For this interface to work properly, the access code given a tenant for an individual unit shouldhave a “0” added to the end. (i.e. “1001234” is the access code given a tenant; “10012340” is theaccess code entered into the MSTC program.) When a tenant rents multiple units, “0,1,2,...”respectively, should be appended to each unit’s access code. (i.e. “1001234” is the access codegiven a tenant for all units he/she rents. “10012340” is the access code entered into MSTC for thefirst unit; “10012341” is entered for the second unit; “10012342” is entered for the third unit, etc.)When the last digit is stripped off by the DigiGate-700 for Windows system, all units will havethe same access code, and therefore, disarm, arm, and display correctly when a tenant enters andleaves the facility.

The DigiGate-700 for Windows program requires MSTC version 5.B.5 or greater for compatibledata transfer.

Page 219: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Appendix G

1. Introduction .....................................................................

2. Serial Port Error Messages .............................................

3. Database Error Messages ...............................................

4. Other Error Messages .....................................................

Error Message Display & Description

Parity and Overrun ErrorsNAK ReceivedPort Not OpenedPort in UseInvalid COM NumberNo more Trigger SlotsTime Out ErrorParity ErrorOverrun ErrorFraming Error

Description of Display

Invalid User IDInvalid PasswordNot IntegerError during Backup

Program Error Codes

Page 220: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

G - 2

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Program Error Codes

This section describes the way the DigiGate-700 for Windows program displays Error Messagesto the user. This trapping or intercepting errors allows the program to continue when possible or toexit gracefully if unable to continue. This prevents data loss and corruption whenever possible.

Program errors can be caused by many different factors: data loss or corruption, conflict with otherprograms, configuration errors, faulty program code, user error, or equipment malfunctions. Theseverity of the error determines how it is handled, i.e. continue and retry or shut down and restartthe program.

Any errors that persist and cause shutdown of the program should be reported to the DigiTechInternational, Inc. Service Department with as much information as possible. This includes theinformation requested in Chapter 1, a description of what you were doing when the error occurred,and the information displayed in the error window.

We have divided the errors into three main categories, Serial Port, Database and Other. Each ofthese categories will open a window to notify the user of the error and one or more buttons to letthe User continue in the manner deemed most appropriate. The format of the information isdifferent for each type and is described in the following pages.

Introduction

Serial Port Error MessagesnoitpircseD rebmuNrorrE noitanalpxE

rorrEnurrevOdnaytiraP 3 noitanalpxeeeS.rorrenurrevoroytirapdeviecerTRAU.woleb

devieceRKAN 12 deviecertonsawrellortnoCmetsySottnesdnammoC.niagayrtdnaKOtceleS.yltcerroc

denepotontroP 1001- denepotonsawesuotdeirtmargorpehttahttropehT.niagayrtdnamargorpehtesolC.yltcerroc

esunitroP 8002- rehtonaybesunisawnepootdeirtmargorpehttropehT.niagayrtdnasmargorpllaesolC.margorp

rebmunmoCdilavnI 1102- ehtnotsixetonseodtahttropanepootedamsawtpmettA.putestroplaireskcehC.CP

stolsreggirteromoN 1005- etaGigiDehtotgnidnopsertonsirellortnoCmetsySehTmetsySehtkcehcdnanwodmargorpehttuhS.erawtfos

.noitareporeporprofrellortnoC

rorrEtuOemiT 6006- metsySehtmorfesnopseradeviecerrevenCPehTehtdnaCPehtneewtebsnoitacinummockcehC.rellortnoC

.rellortnoCmetsyS

rorrEytiraP oreznonforebmuntcerrocehttcelfertondidtibytirapehTsenilnoissimsnartdaberasesuaC.retcarahcatadehtnistib

.smetsysneewtebsretemarapnoissimsnarttnetsisnocniroerusekaM.noitcennocreporprofelbaclairesehtkcehC

s'troplairesehtgnisutonsiecivedromargorprehtona.QRI

rorrEnurrevO ehterofebretcarahcrehtonaseviecerTRAUehtfisruccOehtfiruccolliwrorresihT.deitpmesiretsigeratadreviecer

ehtnahtretsafatadgnittimsnartsirellortnoCmetsyS.tidaernacmargorp

rorrEgnimarF .enostcepxetinehwtibpotsaeviecertonseodTRAU

Page 221: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

G - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

NOTE: The Serial Port Error window displaysone of the errors listed in the table on theprevious page. Serial Port error messagescontain three lines as follows:a. The text error messageb. The error code numberc. Where the error occurredFigure G-1.

1. Click on the OK button.2. Check the connections on the Serial cable.3. Power the System Controller down and up and

then try again.4. If the error persists, call your Reseller or the

Digitech International, Inc. servicedepartment.

The possible database errors are too numerous to listhere, but the format of the Error Box is differentfrom the other categories. The Error window willcontain eight lines as follows:a. The title: EDBEngine Errorb. Total Errors: The total number of errorsc. Module Name: The program module where

the error occurred.d. Message: Text description of error.e. Category: General area of error. i.e. Index,

Data Field, etc. These are innumeric code.

f. Error Code: The numeric error code.g. Sub Code: A Further explanation of the

error in numeric code.h. Native Error: Error message returned from

the database DLL in numericcode. Figure G-2.

1. Record all information in the Error window.2. Click on the OK button.3. Close and reopen the program. Then try again.4. If the error persists, call your Reseller or the

Digitech International, Inc. servicedepartment.

Figure G-1

Figure G-2

Database Error Messages

Page 222: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

G - 4 Program Error Codes

NOTE: This error, Figure G-3, is caused whenthe User ID entered is not found in theDigiGate database. Either the ID was enteredincorrectly, has been removed from thedatabase, or the database is corrupted.

1. Click on the OK button.2. Try again. Enter a valid User ID.3. If the error persists, call your Reseller or the

Digitech International, Inc. service depart-ment.

NOTE: This error, Figure G-4, is caused whenthe User Password entered is not found in theDigiGate-700 for Windows database for theUser entered. Either the Password was enteredincorrectly, the Password has been changed inthe database, or the database is corrupted.

1. Click on the OK button.2. Try again. Enter a valid Password.3. If the error persists, call your Reseller or the

Digitech International, Inc. service depart-ment.

Other Error MessagesThe final category of errors is “Other.” This is all inclusive of anything not yet discussed. Thiscategory holds user errors, other equipment errors, system errors, other program errors, etc.

The Error window for this category only has one line of text, the error message as shown inFigures G-3 and G-4. Error messages for the operating system or for other programs are usually ina different format, such as the Microsoft Backup window Figure G-6, Page G-5.

The majority of these errors are for procedural or operator errors in the DigiGate-700 for Windowsprogram. After reading the message, Click on the OK button and the appropriate action will beperformed.

Figure G-3 Figure G-4

Page 223: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

G - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure G-5

Figure G-6

NOTE: This error, Figure G-5, can occurduring Move In, Move Out, Download All, etc.It is normally associated with a databaseproblem. It can be caused when there is nomux/slot or alarm zone defined for the unit inquestion.

1. Click on the OK button.2. If you know the unit causing the problem, check

that the information above is correct.3. If the error persists, call your Reseller or the

Digitech International, Inc. service depart-ment.

NOTE: This error is reported from theMicrosoft Backup program. The backup setshipped with the DigiGate-700 for Windowsprogram will operate correctly only when thecomputer is named My Computer. If namedsomething else, the message above appears.

1. Click on the OK button.2. Check the computer name and if different,

either rename it or create a new backup set foryour computer or backup device. See thesection “Creating Backup Sets” in “Chapter 5,Backing Up Your Data.”.

3. If the error persists, call your Reseller or theDigitech International, Inc. service depart-ment.

Page 224: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

G - 6

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Program Error Codes

Page 225: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ........................................................................

2. Activity Log Messages ........................................................

3. Transaction Messages .........................................................

Site & Management Activity Messages& Descriptions

Access ActivitiesMisc. (SysCon) ActivitiesBoard ActivitiesTime ActivitiesAlarm Activities

Manager/User Activities

Appendix H

Activity Log & Transaction Messages

Page 226: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

H - 2 Activity Log & Transaction Messages

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

This section describes the way that the DigiGate-700 for Windows program displays ActivityMessages to the user. The site activities are broken down into two categories. The first is tenantactivities which describe tenant movement and usage of the site or the operation of the systemhardware. These activities are listed in the Activity Log and on the Activity Log Report. Thesecond category is management or user activity which shows move in, move out, delinquents,payments, and changes to data in a tenant or unit record. Management activities are shown in theTransaction Log Report and entries will be made when the User initiates an action in the DigiGate-700 for Windows program or when the Accounting program transfers information to the DigiGate-700 for Windows database.

Introduction

Access Activities1. Access Granted - A tenant entered a password at an entry device and was allowed to enter.2. Delinquent - A tenant entered a password at an entry device and was denied access because they were

overdue in their account.3. Bad Password - A password was entered at an entry device but was not found in the SysCon database.4. Bad Keypad Zone - A tenant entered a password at an entry device and was denied access because they

were not authorized to use that specific entry device.5. Bad Time Zone - A tenant entered a password at an entry device and was denied access because they were

not within the authorized hours to use that specific entry device.6. Soft Antipassback - A tenant entered a password at an exit device and was allowed to exit but the Manager

was notified because the tenant had not used an entry device. (Tailgating)7. Hard Antipassback - A tenant entered a password at an exit device and was not allowed to exit and the

Manager was notified because the tenant had not used an entry device. (Tailgating)8. Not Found - When the DigiGate-700 for Windows program is not running, the System Controller stores

all activities in its memory. When the program is started it retrieves all activities from the SysCon andstores them in the database. This message occurs when a code was entered and found valid in the SystemController yet the unit was not found in the DigiGate-700 for Windows database on the PC. This cansignify a database error on the PC. Print and verify a tenant list.

Activity Log Messages

Misc. (SysCon) Activities1. Cold Start - The System Controller has been reset, all memory on the board has been lost and you need to

perform a Set Controller and a Download All Units to complete the proper reset of the system.2. System Reset - The System Controller has lost power for less than one minute. Data should be intact and

the gate should be working normally. This is a notification that a power fluctuation has occurred.3. System Power Off - The System Controller has lost power for more than one minute. Data should be

intact and the gate should be working normally. This is a notification that a power failure has occurred.The keypads will not work while the power is off, but should be OK when the power is back on.

4. System Power On - The System Controller has regained power after a System Power Off.

Page 227: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

H - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Time Activities1. Time Zone Active - This indicates that the starting time of one of the time zones has passed and that the

input points will now operate for tenants in that time zone. The Time Zone name appears in the InputPoint column.

2. Time Zone Idle - This indicates that the ending time of one of the time zones has passed and that the inputpoints will not operate for tenants in that time zone. The Time Zone name appears in the Input Pointcolumn.

3. Timer Op Active - This indicates that the starting time of one of the timer operations has passed and thatthe defined operation will be performed. An example of a timer operation is all tenants cleared from thesite at 11:59 P.M. or all vacant units are armed at 5:00 P.M.

4. Timer OP Idle - This indicates that the ending time of one of the timer operations has passed and that thedefined operation has been performed.

Board Activities1. Board Online - During a Set Controller the board listed under Input Point initialized correctly. This

message applies to the Keypad board, Mux boards, or Graphics boards.2. Board Offline - Communication to the board listed under Input Point has been lost. This could be due to

power failure or RS485 line problems. This message applies to the Keypad boards, Mux boards, orGraphics boards.

3. Board AC Power Fail - The Keypad board, Mux board, Graphics board, or other RS485 device listedunder Input Point has lost its main power source and is running under backup power. This messageoccurs only if the board has a battery backup.

4. Board AC Power Restored - The Keypad board, Mux board, Graphics board, or other RS485 device listedunder Input Point has regained its main power source and is no longer running under backup power. Thismessage occurs only if the board has a battery backup.

5. Board Battery Fail - The Keypad board, Mux board, Graphics board, or other RS485 device listed underInput Point has lost its backup power source. This message occurs only if the board has a battery backup.You should contact your installer or our service department for a new battery.

6. Tamper Closed - This message only appears when the optional Tamper Switch has been installed on a Muxbox. The message indicates that the box is secure.

7. Tamper Open - When the optional Tamper Switch has been installed on a Mux box, this message indicatesthat the box is not secure and has been opened. On a system that does not have the Tamper Switchinstalled, this message will appear right after the Board Online message and has NO significant meaning.

Page 228: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

H - 4 Activity Log & Transaction Messages

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2.3

1. Move In - Indicates that a new tenant has occupied or been moved into a unit.2. Move Out - Indicates that a tenant has vacated or been moved out of a unit.3. Make Delinquent - Indicates that a tenant has become overdue in rent and has been locked out of a unit.4. Paid Up - Indicates that a delinquent tenant has paid their account and regained access to their unit.5. Change Data - Indicates that some change has been made to the tenant’s record, that some information has

changed about this tenant.

The Transaction Log also shows the source of each transaction under User. If a user of the systemhas performed the transaction, their User ID will be shown. If the transaction was one transferredfrom the accounting program, “LINK” will be shown as the User.

Transaction Messages

Alarm ActivitiesThis section only applies to sites where there are individually alarmed units or zones andthe DigiGate-700 for Windows software has been configured to operate in this manner.Unit messages will list the Unit Number and tenant’s Last Name on the log entry alongwith the date and time of the activity. Zone messages will list the Alarm Zone under InputPoint on the log entry.

Unit Messages1. Alarm - An alarmed unit was opened without entering a valid code.2. Secure - After a unit has alarmed, the unit was closed before the alarm zone rearmed.3. Opened - A unit was opened after a valid code was entered.4. Closed - A unit was closed after an Opened status.

Zone Messages1. Alarm Zone Armed - A zone, an area, or group of devices has been set to activate when a defined

condition exists. Zones can be armed by the user in the DigiGate-700 for Windows software, by timeroperations, or by events at the site.

2. Alarm Zone Disarmed - A zone, an area, or group of devices has been set to ignore the defined conditionsfor alarming. Zones can be disarmed by the user in the DigiGate-700 for Windows software, by timeroperations, or by events at the site.

3. Rearm Alarm Zone - Alarm zones are automatically rearmed when a specific amount of time has elapsed(a time-out) following an alarm condition. The time period is defined in the DigiGate-700 for Windowssetup, and once it has elapsed the siren or other notification device is shut off and the zone is rearmed. Thismessage signifies that this event has occurred.

4. Rearm refused - There was an attempt to rearm an alarm zone when tenants were on site. Wait until alltenants have exited from the facility or clear the control area and attempt to rearm the zone.

5. Acknowledge Alarm - This message is shown when the user selects the Acknowledge option in theDigiGate-700 for Windows software. This action initiates the same sequence as the Rearm Alarm Zone,bypassing the time-out period.

Page 229: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. Introduction ------------------------------------------------------

2. Controlling the Display ----------------------------------------

3. Programming the Display -------------------------------------

Introduction

ScanningZoomSite StatusActivity Log

The MenuScanning SpeedsThe Flash SettingThe Delay SettingThe Status Colors

Appendix I

The DigiGraphics System

Page 230: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

I - 2 The DigiGraphics™ System

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Figure I-1

Figure I-2

The DigiGraphics system, (Available as an option to the DigiGate-700 System), is a separatedisplay of your site’s units and their status. DigiGraphics runs independent of your PC through itsown graphics generator designed to display the graphical site plan and unit status. The graphicsgenerator communicates with the DigiGate-700 for Windows System Controller to provide a realtime color coded display of the status of each unit.

The Security Monitoring Station shown in Figure I-1 contains the DigiGraphics system with itsdisplay in the upper right corner; also shown enlarged in Figure I-2. The bottom line on the displayshows the last activity that occurred on the site. Figure I-2.

A multifunction remote control, Figure I-3, Page I-3, allows you to control the display of the site,the activity log, and the unit’s status.

In its normal state, the display scans an enlarged view of your site showing each unit, labeled withits number and in a color that gives its status.

The default color designations are:

Green for Vacant UnitsBlue for Rented UnitsDark Red for Delinquent UnitsFlashing Medium Red for Units AlarmedFlashing Yellow for Tenants On-SiteOrange for List (Highlighting from the Find function)

Introduction

Page 231: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

I - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Controlling the DisplayThe display of the DigiGraphics system is controlled with a multifunction remote control similarto the one you use for your TV set or VCR. Figure I-3. The remote has a keypad with 16 keys thatcontrol the scanning direction and rate, zoom, activity log display, unit status display and colorselection for the unit status display. Since the full size site display with unit numbers is larger thanthe screen, the default state of the display is a random scanning of this full size site plan on thedisplay monitor.

When the Zoom key is pressed, Figure I-3, thedisplay is zoomed out to a footprint or full viewof the site. Figure I-4.

In this view only building outlines are dis-played.

The End key or the Scan key will return youto the default scanning mode or the system willautomatically return to scanning after 2minutes.

Figure I-4

There are eight directional arrow keys locatedaround the Scan key on the remote; twovertical (up and Down), two horizontal (rightand left), and four diagonal (upper right and leftand lower right and left). The screen image willmove in the direction indicated when one ofthese keys is pressed. The Scan key willreturn the screen to the default scanning patternwhen pressed.

When the area of the display you want to viewis found, the Stop key will freeze the displayso it may be viewed. The Scan key will returnthe display to the default scanning mode or thesystem will automatically return to scanningafter 2 minutes.

Scanning Zoom

Figure I-3

Page 232: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

I - 4 The DigiGraphics™ System

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Pressing the Activity Log key, Figure I-3,Page I-3, displays the Activity Log screen.Figure I-6. This screen shows the site activi-ties; keypad entries, alarm and rearm zones, etc.

The last activities are shown in the order thatthey happened. The screen cannot be scrolledbackwards to view prior activities. To viewprior activities, display the activity log in theDigiGate-700 for Windows program.

The End key or the Scan key will return youto the default scrolling mode or the system willautomatically return to scanning after 2minutes.

Pressing the Status key, Figure I-3, Page I-3,displays the Site Status screen. Figure I-5.This screen shows the current number of VacantUnits, Rented Units, Delinquent Units, and thenumber of Tenants Onsite.

The End key or the Scan key will return youto the default scrolling mode or the system willautomatically return to scanning after 2minutes.

Site Status Activity Log

Figure I-5 Figure I-6

Page 233: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

I - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

The DigiGraphics system allows you to change some of the default settings. The defaults that canbe changed are: Scan speed, Flash speed, time Delay after keypad entry, and the color settings forthe unit’s status.

These settings are changed using the Menu key on the remote control. Figure I-3, Page I-3.

Programming the Display

6. Press the Log key to select the item you want tochange. The status bar will show “Use up/down arrows to increment, thenEND.” Use the arrow keys to change the valuethen press the End key to save the change.

6. You may then use the arrow keys to go to thenext value you want to change. Repeat theprocedure in steps 5 and 6 for each item youdecide to change.

7. When all changes have been made, pressthe End key to return to the normaldisplay of the Site.

The Menu1. To access the DigiGraphics menu, press the

Stop key on the remote to suspend scanning.2. Press the Menu key to activate the on-screen

Menu. Figure I-7.3. The status bar at the bottom of the display

screen gives instructions as you proceed.Figure I-7.

4. The enlarged menu shown in Figure I-8, showsthe default settings for the selections.

5. Press the up or down arrow key until theselection you want is named in the status bar.i.e. “Press the LOG key to modifyxyz parameter.” Here “xyz” will bereplaced by each choice as you press the arrowkeys.

Figure I-8

Figure I-7

Page 234: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

I - 6 The DigiGraphics™ System

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2.3

Scanning Speeds

The Flash setting determines how fast the Onsite or Alarmed units blink on the screen. Therange is from 1 to 10 seconds. The higher the setting number, the slower the rate of blinking.

Use the procedure listed in the Menu on Page I-5 to change these settings.

When a tenant uses the entrance keypad, the exit keypad, or their unit alarms the DigiGraphics isprogrammed to move the display to that unit and flash it in the appropriate color for the Delaytime set here. The default is 10 seconds and it may be changed within a range of 1 to 25 seconds.After the delay time, the screen resumes scanning the site.

Use the procedure listed in the Menu on Page I-5 to change these settings.

The Flash Setting

The prior four settings; Scroll, Jump, Flash, and Delay deal with time elements and are shown onthe screen in black. The next six deal with colors to denote the status of each unit and will displayin the color selected. The Status settings are Rented, Vacant, Delinquent, and List which display insolid colors; and Alarm and Onsite which display in a blinking color that alternates with black.

In a standard display, one of the three basic status colors will display for each unit. These are theRented, Vacant, and Delinquent colors.

When a tenant enters the gate, the display will jump to their unit and blink in the Onsite color. If aunit is alarmed, the display will jump to the alarmed unit and blink in the Alarm color.

Each selection is changed by the procedure outlined in the Menu section Page I-5. The range ofcolors available is from 1 to 255. As each color number is changed, the display of that selectionwill change to the color that will be seen on the display.

When you have completed all selections, press the End key until you return to the normal display.Then press the Scan key to resume scanning the site.

There are two entries for scanning speed. The first is listed as Scroll, which determines the speedthat the display moves for the default automatic scanning.

The second is listed as Jump, which determines the speed that the display moves when you pressthe Stop key and then use the arrow keys to scan the picture.

The picture will move faster as the number increases for both of these settings. The range allowedis from 1 to 10 for each setting.

Use the procedure listed in the Menu on Page I-5 to change these settings.

The Delay Setting

The Status Colors

Page 235: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Appendix

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

1. The Electronic User’s Guide............................................

2. Adobe® Acrobat® Reader ...............................................

Where and How?

Installing or Updating the Reader.

Appendix J

Electronic User’s Guide and the Acrobat® Reader

Page 236: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

J - 2 Preparation for Adding Units

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

2.3

We have included an electronic version of the DigiGate-700™ for Windows® User’s Guide onyour Installation CD. This manual is viewable with the Adobe® Acrobat® Reader v3.x or 4.0.For those that do not have the Acrobat® Reader installed, or would like to upgrade your versionto 4.0, an installation program has been provided.

The DigiGate Installation installed the Electronic User’s Guide in a directory named “Manual”under the DigiGate directory in Program Files. An Icon to start the reader is also installed on yourDesktop.

The Electronic User’s Guide

If you are upgrading to Acrobat® version 4.0 from a 3.x version, you MUST first un-installthe 3.x version, then install the 4.0 version. Un-installing the 3.x version AFTER you haveinstalled the 4.0 version will erase some necessary files and cause problems when runningAcrobat® Reader.

To install and set up the electronic manual reader, Acrobat® Reader.

1. Place the DigiGate-700 for Windows CD into your CD-ROM drive.2. On the Windows 95/98 Task Bar, Click on the Start button, then select Run.3. Click on the Browse button.4. Navigate to your CD-ROM drive {d:}, then to the Acrobat directory.5. Double Click on “Acrd4enu.exe”.6. This will start the Acrobat® Reader installation program. Follow the instructions on the screen. When

completed, you will have an Acrobat Reader 4.0 icon on your desktop.

Running Acrobat® Reader.

1. The DigiGate-700 for Windows installation will create a shortcut on your desktop and in yourDigiGate folder on the Start menu to run the Electronic Manual. If you choose, you may delete theicon on your desktop.

2. Select the DigiGate User’s Guide icon on the desktop or from the Start menu selectPrograms>DigiGate>DigiGate User’s Guide. The Electronic Manual will open in the Acrobat®Reader.

If you receive a “No program associated with: {d:}\Acrobat\DWManual.pdf”error, you must install the Acrobat® Reader program as described above.

The Acrobat® Reader Manual is available from the Help menu in the Acrobat® Reader programand is also included on the DigiGate-700 for Windows CD in the “Acrobat” directory and maybe viewed as described above and printed from the Acrobat® Reader program.

“Acrobat® Reader Copyright© 1987-1999 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorpo-rated.”

Adobe® Acrobat® Reader

Page 237: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Appendix K

Program Registration

1. Introduction ....................................................................

2. Starting the Program the First Time ............................

3. The Temporary Regisration Period ..............................

3. Program Registration ....................................................

Registration Codes

Temporary Registration PeriodThe RegistrationWindow

NotificationExpiration

Registration IDRegistration CodeError Messages

Page 238: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

K - 2 Program Registration Codes

Figure K-3

Figure K-1

Figure K-2

IntroductionBy installing or using Software provided with this purchase, PURCHASER indicates acceptance ofthe Conditional Software License Agreement included with the software. Under this License, theSoftware may be supplied to PURCHASER with a temporary activation code. Once all purchaseterms have been complied with, including all payments as agreed, a Software Registration will beissued with a permanent registration code. If this software has been provided with a temporaryactivation code, use the following instructions:

1. The first time you start the program, theInformation window will open with notifica-tion that you need to register your DigiGate-700 for Windows software. Figure K-1.

2. From the Main Menu, Figure 3-46, Page 3-24,Click on the Utility button and Select the DataUtilities tab.

3. Click on the Registration button. Figure K-2.

4. This will open the Registration Informationwindow. Figure K-3.

5. This window will give you the Status of yoursoftware’s registration, the Days Remainingon your temporary registration, and theRegistration ID for your system.

Starting the Program for the First Time

Page 239: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

K - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure K-4 Figure K-5

1. You will be notified every 10 days of the daysremaining in your temporary registration for thefirst 50 days and every day for the last 10 dayswith the Information screen. Figure K-4.

2. The Error window, Figure K-5, will notify youif the 60 day temporary registration expires.

3. When the temporary registration expires, theDigiGate-700™ for Windows program isdisabled for data entry and linking with anymanagement or accounting program, and willnot transfer information to or from the SystemController.

NOTE: The System Controller will continue tooperate the gate with the existing tenant codeseven though updating of the system controller isdisabled.

4. The functions that continue to operate from the

The Temporary Registration Period

Page 240: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

K - 4 Program Registration Codes

Main Menu,are the Exit function to quit theprogram, the Help system, and one section ofthe Utilities menu. Figure K-6.

5. The Registration section of the Data Utilities

tab is all that is available from the Utilitiesmenu. Figure K-7.

Figure K-6

Figure K-7

Page 241: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

K - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

1. Call Digitech International, Inc. at the numberindicated. You will be asked to provide theRegistration ID listed in this window.

2. The technician will provide you with aRegistration Code.

3. Click on the Registration button on theUtility menu. Figure K-7, Page K-4.

4. This will open the Registration Informationwindow. Figure K-8.

5. Enter the new code, provided by Digitech, intothe Registration Code field and Click on theOK button. Figure K-9.

Figure K-8 Figure K-9

Program Registration

Page 242: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

K - 6 Program Registration Codes

6. If the code you entered was the permanentregistration code, the Information window,Figure K-10, will be displayed.

7. If the code you entered was an extension code,the Information window, Figure K-11, will bedisplayed with the number of days added toyour temporary registration.

Figure K-10 Figure K-11

Page 243: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

K - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure K-12 Figure K-13

8. The Error window, Figure K-12, will appear ifyou have entered the registration code incor-rectly.

9. Check your entry and, if necessary, contactDigitech International, Inc. at the numberlisted in the window.

10. If you have reset your system clock to aprevious time in order to reactivate yourregistration, the window shown in Figure K-12will be displayed and your Digigate-700™ forWindows software will be disabled.

11. Contact Digitech at the number listed in thewindow.

Page 244: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

K - 8

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Program Registration Codes

Page 245: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

Included in this Chapter

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Appendix L

Setting Up the LE Software Version

1. Introduction ....................................................................

2. Copying the Desktop Icon ..............................................

3. Renaming the Copy of.. Desktop Icon ............................

4. Changing the Properties of the New Desktop Icon .......

5. Changes in the LE Version .............................................

When to use the Lite and RegularVersions.

Creating a new icon for the LE version.

Identifying the new icon.

Setting the icon to start the program.

What is different.

Page 246: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 2 Setting Up the LE Software Version

DigiGate-700™ for Windows® LE is a more resource-efficient version of our popular access software. Thisprogram is designed for self-storage managers who run multiple programs simultaneously, yet desire bothmaximum speed and smooth operation.

Despite the increased hard drive capacity and memory of new computers, the resources available to runmultiple programs often lag behind. At times, this can create conflicts in the way applications useresources within the computer. In response to inquiries, Digitech began shipping DigiGate-700™ forWindows® LE with software version 5.8 in July of 2000.

Use DigiGate-700™ for Windows® LE Version in day-to-day operations. When you need to print specialreports from the DigiGate-700™ program, or access the full Setup and Utility menu, simply open the fullversion of the program. Once complete, re-open the LE Version.

If you have software version 5.8, use the following step-by-step instructions to install LE. If you have aversion prior to 5.8 and find that you need LE to help your system, call or e-mail our Technical Supportteam for an upgraded version of DigiGate-700™ for Windows®.

1. Installing the DigiGate-700™ for Windows®software will place a DigiGate for Windowsicon on your desktop. Figure L-1

Copying the Desktop Icon2. Right Click on the icon and Select Copy from

the menu. Figure L-2

Figure L-1 Figure L-2

Page 247: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

3. Right Click on the icon again and SelectPaste from the menu. Figure L-3

4. A second icon will be placed on the desktopnamed Copy of.... Figure L-4

Figure L-3 Figure L-4

Page 248: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 4 Setting Up the LE Software Version

Figure L-5 Figure L-6

Renaming the Copy of… Desktop Icon1. Right Click on the Copy Of… icon and Select

Rename from the menu. Figure L-52. Type DigiGate 700 for Windows LE

as the new name. Figure L-6

Page 249: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

Figure L-7 Figure L-8

2. This will open the Properties window.Figure L-8

3. In the Target field, C:\Program Files\DigiGate\DigiWin.exe will be displayed.

4. Place your cursor after DigiWin and add thetext LE before .exe.

5. Click on the Apply button.

Changing the Properties of the New Desktop Icon1. Right Click on the …WindowsLE icon and

Select Properties from the menu. Figure L-7

Page 250: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 6 Setting Up the LE Software Version

6. Click on the Close button. Figure L- 9

Figure L-9 Figure L-10

7. The DigiGate 700 LE icon will now start theLimited version of the DigiGate program.Figure L-10

Page 251: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

The Main Menu1. The Transfer button, top row center, and the

Editor button on the bottom row, wereeliminated from the Main Menu in the LEversion. Figure L-11

2. The Site button, bottom row, is also blank.The Remote software does not have a LEversion.

1. The All Units, Rented Units, Vacant Units,Onsite, and Activity Log reports remain onthe Report Menu

2. They remain the same as they were in thestandard version.

Figure L-11

Figure L-12

Changes in the LE VersionThe Report Menu

Page 252: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

L - 8 Setting Up the LE Software Version

The Utility Menu1. The Data Utilities tab was removed from the

LE version, with the exception of theRegistration button.

2. The Access Code button, on the SystemController tab was replaced with the DataUtilities button.

1. The esential features left on the Setup menuare the Add Units and Delete Units buttonsfrom the Unit Setup tab, and Time Zone andthe Serial Port buttons from the SysconSetup tab.

Figure L-13 Figure L-14

The Setup Menu

Page 253: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 1DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

AACCESS 3-4

24 Hour 2-25Code 3-4, 3-6, 3-20, 3-21, 3-58Never Locked 3-20

ACCOUNTINGLink F-2Vendor Specific Requirements

MSTC Unit Numbering F-4ACKNOWLEDGE

Alarm Zone 3-72, 4-12ACROBAT READER J-2ACTIVITY

Gate 4-14Log 2-8, 2-9, 3-46, 3-57, 4-12, 4-14, H-2,

I-4Delete 3-62

Message H-2Number to Display 2-9Tagged 3-4Time to Display 2-9

Transaction 3-48Delete 3-62

User 3-46ADD

Credit Card Types 2-23Default Values 2-13Door Alarm Options 2-40Door Types 2-33Floor 2-35Holidays 2-29Icon to desktop for LE version L-2Inside/Outside 2-44, 4-4Insurance Codes 2-21Linked Unit 3-6Marketing Codes 2-21Other Authorized Tenants 3-22, 4-6Profile Codes 2-19Required Fields 2-10Security Levels 2-7, 4-10Site 2-15Tenants

Move In 3-2

IndexOther Authorized 3-22, 4-6Select Unit by Size or Number 3-2

Time Zones 2-25Unit 2-39, 4-4, C-2

Door Alarm Options 2-40Door Type 2-35Features 2-33Floor Type 2-35Size Codes 2-37Type 2-30

User ID's 2-9, 4-10ADOBE ACROBAT READER J-2ALARM. See also DOOR ALARM

Acknowledge 3-72, 4-12Arm. See ARM/DISARMDisarm. See ARM/DISARM: UnitMux/Slot. See MUX/SLOTStatus 2-45, 3-73, 4-12Zone 2-41, 2-45, 3-72, 4-4, 4-12

ANTI PASSBACK H-2ARM/DISARM

Alarm Zone 3-72, 4-12Unit 2-26, 3-73, 4-12

AUTHORIZEDTenants 3-6, 3-22, 4-6

AUTO LOADING OPTIONS 2-41, 4-4

BBACKUP

Data 3-61, 4-2Data Backup 5-3Data Restore 5-6Introduction 5-2Strategies 5-2

BAD. See also ERRORCode

Tenant H-2User G-4

Keypad Zone H-2Password

Tenant H-2User G-4

Time Zone H-2

Page 254: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 2 Index

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

CCHANGE. See MODIFYCHANGES IN THE LE VERSION L-7

The Main Menu L-7The Report Menu L-7The Setup Menu L-8The Utility Menu L-8

CLEARArea 3-55, 3-59Graphics 3-59System Controller 4-12Tenants 3-59

CLOSE GATE 3-24, 4-10CODE

Access 3-4, 3-6, 3-21Retrieve 3-59

Credit Card 2-22Insurance 2-20Marketing 2-18Size 2-38Tenant Profile 2-17

COMMON ELEMENTS OF REPORTS 3-28COMMUNICATIONS (COM) PORT 2-29CONFIGURE. See SETUPCONTROL

Windows Screen 1-7CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS GUIDE 1-4CREDIT CARD 2-22, 3-4CUSTOMER SUPPORT. See SERVICE

DDAMAGED 2-47DATE/TIME 3-54DEFAULT

Colors I-2Fields 2-12, A-2Password 2-3Settings A-2User ID 2-3Values 2-13, A-3

DEFINE. See ADD

DELETEActivity Log 3-62Credit Card Types 2-24Door Types 2-34Floor Types 2-36Holidays 2-28Insurance Codes 2-22Marketing Codes 2-20Other Authorized Tenants 3-22Profile Codes 2-18Time Zones 2-26Transaction Log 3-62Unit 2-42, 4-4

Door Type 2-34Features 2-32Floor Type 2-36Size Codes 2-38Type 2-31

User ID 2-10DELINQUENT 3-10

Making Tenants Delinquent 3-12, 4-6Making Tenants Paid Up 3-13, 4-6Selecting a Unit or Tenant 3-11

DIGICONVERT E-2DIGIEDIT. See WORD PROCESSINGDIGIGATE-700 FOR WINDOWS. See

SOFTWAREOn the Taskbar 3-81

DIGIGRAPHICS I-2. See also GRAPHICSActivity Log I-4Delay I-6Programming Menu I-4Scanning I-2, I-6Site Edit 1-14Site Status I-5Status Colors I-6Zoom I-3

DIGITECH INTERNATIONAL, INC.How to Reach 1-1

Corporate Address 1-1Internet and E-Mail 1-1Service Department 1-1Telephone and Fax 1-1

Page 255: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 3DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

DISARM. See ARM/DISARMDISCONNECT FROM REMOTE SITE 3-75DISPLAY

Activity Log 3-56, 4-12Site I-2

DOOR ALARM 2-26, 2-40, 2-45, 4-4. Seealso ALARM; ARM/DISARM; MUX/SLOT. See also AUTO LOADINGOPTIONS

DOOR TYPE 2-32DOWNLOAD 3-52, 4-12

EEDIT. See MODIFYEDITOR. See WORD PROCESSINGELECTRONIC USER'S GUIDE J-2ERROR G-2

Code G-2Connecting to Remote Site 3-76Message G-2

Database G-3Other G-4Serial Port G-2

EXIT 3-80

FFEATURES

New in this Version E-2Unit. See UNIT: Add; UNIT: Modify

FIND 3-18Unit / Tenant 3-18, 4-8

FLOOR TYPE 2-34FONT. See Conventions used in this Guide

GGATE 3-24, 4-10GRAPHICS 3-59. See also DIGIGRAPHICS

Site Edit 1-14

HHARDWARE

Repair Policy xWarranty viii

HELP 3-77Bubble 2-4Context Sensitive 3-77Find 3-78Help System Window 3-77

Find 3-78Index 3-78

Hypertext 3-79Index 3-78Show Me 3-79

HOLD GATE OPEN 3-24, 4-10HOLIDAY 2-29HOW DO I? 4-1

IINDEX X-1INSTALLATION 1-8, 4-2

Adobe Acrobat Reader J-2INSURANCE CODES 2-21INTERFACE 1-5

KKEYPAD ZONE 3-4, 3-6

LLABELS 3-43LCD Keypad 2-46

Adding Custom Messages 2-47, 2-51Default Custom Messages 2-52Default Preset Messages 2-52Deleting Custom Messages 2-52Editing Custom Messages 2-47

LCD Keypad OptionAssigning 3-5, 3-82

LINK 3-15, 4-8Button 3-15

LINKING 3-7, 3-15, 4-6Move Out 3-10

LIST. See REPORTSLOCKED

Never Locked 3-20Record Edit 3-18

LOGON 2-2

Page 256: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 4 Index

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

MMAIL MERGE 3-66, 3-69MAILING LABELS 3-43MANUAL

ElectronicAcrobat Reader J-2DigiGate-700 for Windows J-2

MARKETINGCode 2-18–2-20Credit Card 2-22, 2-25, 3-4Information 3-4Miles From Site 3-4Profile 2-17–2-18, 3-4Report 3-37Type 2-19, 2-21

MENUArm/Disarm 3-72Delinquent 3-11Editor 3-64Exit 3-80Find 3-18Gate 3-24Help 3-77Move In 3-2Move Out 3-8Reports 3-26, 3-27, 3-28, 3-29Setup 2-5Transfer 3-14Utility 3-50

MERGE 3-69, D-2MESSAGE

ActivityAccess H-2Alarm H-4Board H-2Misc (SysCon) H-2Time H-2

Activity Log H-2Error G-2, G-3, G-4LCD Keypad 2-46

Adding 2-47, 2-51, 3-82Default Custom 2-52Default Preset 2-52

Deleting 2-52Editing 2-46

Transaction 3-48MICROSOFT BACKUP 2-14, 4-2, G-5MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS 1-2MISCELLANEOUS 3-4MODEM 2-16, 2-29MODIFY

Access Code 3-20, 3-21Activity Log 2-8Credit Card Types 2-25Door Alarm Options 2-40, 2-45

Alarm Zone 2-45, 4-4Arm/Disarm 4-4Mux/Slot 2-45, 4-4

Door Types 2-34, 2-44Floor Types 2-36, 2-44, 4-4Holidays 2-29Inside/Outside 2-44, 4-4Insurance Codes 2-23Keypad Zone 3-20Linked Units 4-6Marketing Codes 2-19Other Authorized Tenants 3-22Profile Codes 2-17, 2-19Required Fields 2-10Security Levels 2-14Tenant Information 2-17, 3-18, 3-19,

4-8Time Zones 2-26, 3-20Unit 2-42, 4-5

Damaged 2-47Door Alarm Options 4-4Door Types 2-34, 2-44, 4-4Features 2-32, 4-4Floor Types 2-36, 2-44Numbers 4-4Size Codes 2-39, 2-45, 4-4Status 2-47Types 2-30, 4-4

Unit Information 3-19User IDs 2-11

MOVE IN 3-2–3-3, 4-6Access Information 3-4

Page 257: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 5DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Linking Units 3-6Misc. Information 3-4Notes 3-6Other Authorized Tenants 3-6Selecting a Unit 3-2Tenant information 3-5Unit Information 3-5

MOVE OUT 3-9, 4-6Linked Units 3-10Selecting a Unit or Tenant 3-8

MSTC SoftwareUnit Numbering F-4

MUX/SLOT 2-41, 2-45, 4-4, 4-16. See alsoALARM; DOOR ALARM

NNEVER LOCKED 3-20NOTES 3-6

OOBJECTS 1-6OPEN GATE 3-24, 4-10OPENING SAVED REPORTS 3-29OPTIONS

LCD Keypad 2-46, 3-82Adding Messages 2-51Message 2-47

Picture 3-19, 3-83Assigning 3-83, 3-84

OTHER AUTHORIZED 4-6

PPASSWORD 2-3, 2-8PAY UP 3-12, 4-6PICTURE

Option 3-19, 3-83Assigning 3-83, 3-84

PRINTER SELECTION 3-26PRINTING

Reports 3-26PROFILE TYPE 2-19PROMPTS

Verify 2-8

QQUIT THE PROGRAM 4-2

RRECORD

Locked by Other User 3-18REGISTRATION

CodeExtension K-6Permanent K-5

Program K-2Errors K-7Extension K-6Procedure K-5Temporary K-3

REMOTESite 2-15, 2-16

Communications 2-29Data Path 2-16

REMOTE SITE 3-75REPAIR POLICY

Hardware xREPORTS 3-26

Access Codes Retrieved from SysCon 3-58Activity 3-46

Activity Log 3-46, 4-14Onsite 3-47, 4-14Transactions 3-48

Common Elements 3-27, 3-28Footer 3-28, 3-29Header 3-28Miscellaneous Reports 3-44

Mux/Slot 3-45, 4-16Setup Info 3-44, 3-45, 4-16

Opening Saved 3-29Printer Selection 3-26Printing 3-26Report Window control 3-27Saving 3-29Unit Reports 3-30

All Units 3-30Authorized 3-36Days Vacant 3-40

Page 258: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 6 Index

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

Delinquent Units 3-31Linked Units 3-35Mailing Labels 3-43Marketing 3-37Rented Units 3-33, 4-16Vacant Units 3-32

Viewing 3-27REQUIRED

Fields 2-11, 3-4System 1-2

RESTOREBackup 3-60, 5-6

RESTORE DATA 5-6

SSAVING REPORTS 3-29SCREEN OBJECTS 1-6, 1-7SECURITY LEVELS 2-4, 2-8, 4-10SELECT PRINTER 3-26SELECT SITE 3-74SERIAL PORT 2-29SERVICE

Contacting 1-2Hours 1-2What You Need 1-3

SETBackup. See BACKUP: SetsSystem Controller 4-12

SETTINGS 2-17, A-2SETUP

Activity Log 2-8, 4-12Adding Units 2-39, C-2

Unit Features 2-40Unit Numbers 2-39

Deleting Units 2-42Removing Units from Database 4-4

LCD Keypad 2-46Adding Messages 2-46

Miscellaneous SetupCredit Card Codes 2-22Insurance Codes 2-20

Modifying Units 2-42Changing Unit Information 2-45, 4-4

Mux/Slot 2-40. See also MUX/SLOTOptions 2-46

LCD Keypad 2-46Site Setup 2-2, 2-15, B-2System Configuration Form B-2System Controller Setup 2-5, 2-24, 2-46

Door Alarms 2-26Holidays 2-29Time Zones 2-24

System Setup 2-4, 2-5, 2-29, 4-16Default Values 2-12, 2-13Required Fields 2-10, 2-11, 2-13Security Levels 2-4, 2-8System Configuration 2-12System User ID's 2-9, 2-13, 4-10System User Password 2-8

Unit Setup 2-30Door Types 2-32Floor Types 2-34Unit Features 2-33, 2-40Unit Size 2-36Unit Types 2-31

SITEDefinition 2-15Display I-2Remote 2-16Selection 3-74

Local 3-75Remote 3-75

Setup 2-2, B-2, C-2Status I-5

SITE EDIT 1-14SLOT. See MUX/SLOTSOFTWARE

Adobe Acrobat ReaderInstallation J-2

DigiConvert E-2DigiEdit 3-65

Creating Merge Documents 3-66Edit Menu 3-67File Menu 3-65Insert Menu 3-66Mail Merge 3-69, 4-14, D-2Status Bar 3-64

Page 259: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 7DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

DigiGate-700 for WindowsBackup 2-14, G-5Error Codes G-2Installation 1-8, 4-2Logon Screen 2-2Minimum Requirements 1-2New Features E-2On the Taskbar 3-81Quitting the Program 4-2Required Fields 2-10Starting the Program 2-2, 4-2Version 3-54, 4-10

DigiGate-700 for Windows LE L-1Setup L-2

LE Version L-2LinkView F-2Site Edit 1-14Version 3-54, 4-10Windows® 1-5

Controls 1-7Screen Objects 1-6Terms used 1-5

STARTING THE PROGRAM 2-2, 4-2SUPPORT. See SERVICESYSCON. See SYSTEM CONTROLLERSYSTEM

HardwareRepair Policy xWarranty viii

Minimum Requirements 1-2Setup 2-4, 2-29, 4-10, 4-16Terms & Conditions of Purchase viii

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2-12SYSTEM CONTROLLER 3-50, 4-10

Clear 3-51Reset 4-12Restore 3-51Setup 2-24, 2-46, 3-51, 3-53

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1-2

TTAG A UNIT 3-4TASKBAR 3-81TECHNICAL SUPPORT. See SERVICE

TENANT 4-16Access Code 3-4, 3-6, 3-20, 3-21, 3-58,

3-59Address 3-5City 3-5Credit Card 3-4

Expiration Date 3-4Number 3-4Type 3-4

Find/Edit 3-19, 4-8Information 3-5. See also

DEFAULT; DELETE; MODIFY; MOVEIN; MOVE OUT; TRANSFERDefault 2-13, 2-16

Insurance 3-4Keypad Zone 3-4, 4-6License 3-4Linked Units 3-15Make Delinquent 3-13, 4-6Make Paid Up 3-12, 4-6Marketing 3-4Miles From Site 3-4Move In 3-2, 4-6Move Out 3-9, 4-6Name

Company 3-5First 3-5Last 3-5

Never Locked Out 3-20Not Found H-2Notes 3-6Phone

Fax 3-5Home 3-5Work 3-5

Profile 2-17Reports 3-30SSN# 3-4Time Zone 3-4Transfer Units 3-14, 3-16, 4-8

TENANTS ONSITE 4-14Terms & Conditions of Purchase viiiTERMS USED 1-5

Page 260: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 8 Index

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

TIME ZONE 3-4, 3-624 Hour 2-25Pre-defined 2-25Setup 2-24

TRANSACTIONMessage H-4Report 3-48

TRANSFER 3-14, 4-8Link Units 4-8Select a Unit or Tenant 3-15Unit 3-16

TYPE. See Conventions used in this Guide

UUNIT 3-5

Add 2-39Alarm Status 2-45Alarm Zone 2-45, 3-72, 4-4, 4-12Arm/Disarm 3-72, 3-73, 4-4, 4-12Damaged 2-47Delete 2-42, 4-4Door Alarm Options 2-40, 4-4Door Type 2-34, 2-35, 4-4Download 3-52, 4-4Features 2-33, 2-40, 4-4Find 3-19, 4-8Floor 2-35, 4-4Height 2-39, 4-4Inside/Outside 2-40, 2-44, 4-4Linking 3-6, 3-15Modify 2-42, 4-4Mux 2-40, 2-45, 4-4, 4-16. See also

MUX/SLOTNumber 2-39, 4-4Price 2-39, 4-4Setup 2-30Size 2-36–2-38, 2-45, 4-4Slot 2-41, 2-45, 4-4, 4-16. See also MUX/

SLOTSquare Feet 2-39, 4-4Status 2-47, I-2Tag 3-4Transfer 3-15, 3-16Type 2-31, 4-4

UPGRADE 2-2, E-2USER

ID 2-3, 2-9, 2-13, 4-10Login 2-2, 2-13Password 2-3Security Level 2-11Setup

Activity Log Display 2-9USER'S GUIDE

Electronic J-2UTILITY 3-51

Data Utilities 3-60Backup 3-61Remove 3-63Restore 3-60

System Controller 3-51Access Code 3-58Activity Log 3-56Clear Area 3-55Clear Graphics 3-59Clear Syscon 3-50Date/Time 3-54Download All 3-52Set Controller 3-53Version 3-54

VVACANT

Units 3-9, 3-10, 3-33, 4-6VERIFY

Prompts 2-8VERSION 3-54, 4-10VIEWING REPORTS 3-27

WWARRANTY

System Hardware viiiWhat’s New in the Windows Version E-2WINDOW

Error G-3, G-4, G-5Status Bar 3-64Title Bar 1-7, 3-64

Page 261: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 9DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

WINDOWSControls 1-6, 1-7Interface 1-5, 1-6New Features E-2Objects 1-6Screen 1-6Terms 1-5

WORD PROCESSING 3-65. See alsoSOFTWARE: DigiEdit

Creating a Merge Document 4-14DigiEdit 3-65, 4-14, D-2Mail Merge 4-14Mege Data Fields 4-14, D-2

ZZONE

Alarm 2-45, 3-72, 4-12Keypad 3-4Time 2-26, 3-4

Page 262: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

X - 10 Index

DigiGate-700 for Windows™ ®

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

2.3

Page 263: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software
Page 264: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software
Page 265: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software
Page 266: DigiGate User’s Guide · 2017-12-12 · DigiGate-700™ for Windows® - User’s Guide v DigiGate-700™ for Windows® Find System Controller Version .....4-10 Find Software

DigiGateUser’s Guide

Digitech International, Inc.800 523 9504 toll freewww.digitech-intl.com